Contents

Canon BCTV Zoom Lens Operation Manual PDF

1 of 369
1 of 369

Summary of Content for Canon BCTV Zoom Lens Operation Manual PDF

ENGLISH VERSION See Page E1 ........................... C1

1

BCTV

CD-ROM

2

.......................................................................................................................................................2

................................................................................................................5

..................................................................................................................................9

................................................................................................................. 11

............................................................................................................................12

1. 1.1 .........................................................................................................................1-2

Top ..........................................................................................................................................................1-2 MENU .....................................................................................................................................................1-3

2. Top 2.1 Top .........................................................................................................................2-2

2.2 .......................................................................................................................................2-4 (User 0 9) .....................................................................................................................2-5

(User A) ....................................................................................................................2-6 (User A) ....................................................................................................................2-9

2.3 ................................................................................................................2-12 (1) .........................................................................................................2-12 (2) ......................................................................................................2-13

2.4 ON/OFF ..........................................................................................2-14

2.5 AUX1 ..................................................................................................2-15

2.6 VTR .....................................................................................................2-16

2.7 AUX2 ..................................................................................................2-17

2.8 RET .....................................................................................................2-18 2.9 Frame Preset1 .................................................................................................................2-19

(1) Frame Preset1 ....................................................................................2-19 (2) Frame Preset1 ON/OFF .......................................................................................2-20 (3) Frame Preset1 ON/OFF A ........................................2-21

2.10 Frame Preset2 ..............................................................................................................2-22 (1) Frame Preset2 ....................................................................................2-22 (2) Frame Preset2 ON/OFF .......................................................................................2-23 (3) Frame Preset2 ON/OFF A ........................................2-24

2.11 ..............................................................................................................2-25

2.12 ......................................................................................................2-26 (1) .............................................................................................................2-26 (2) ...............................................................................................2-27

2.13 A/M .................................................................................................2-28

2.14 ..........................................................................................................2-29

3

3. MENU 3.1 MENU .....................................................................................................................3-2

3.2 User ......................................................................................................................................3-3 (User 0 9) .........................................................................................................................3-4 ................................................................................................................................3-5 ..................................................................................................................................................3-6

(1) 1 .....................................................................................................3-6 (2) ....................................................................................................3-7

1 1 .....................................................................................3-8 .......................................................................................................................3-10

(1) 1 ...............................................................3-10 (2) ..............................................................3-12 (3) ........................................................................................................................3-14

(User 0 9) ...................................................................................................................3-15 (User A) .......................................................................................................................3-19 (User A) .......................................................................................................................3-23 ............................................................................................................................................3-26

3.3 Switch .................................................................................................................................3-27 AUX1 ............................................................................................................3-28 AUX2 ............................................................................................................3-29 VTR ...............................................................................................................3-30 RET ...............................................................................................................3-31 A/M ......................................................................................................................3-32 .......................................................................................................................3-33

3.4 Preset .................................................................................................................................3-35 Frame Preset1 ..............................................................................................3-36 Frame Preset1 ON/OFF ....................................................................................................3-37 Frame Preset1 ON/OFF A .....................................................3-38 Frame Preset2 ..............................................................................................3-39 Frame Preset2 ON/OFF ....................................................................................................3-40 Frame Preset2 ON/OFF A .....................................................3-41 ..............................................................................................3-42 .................................................................................................3-43 .................................................................................................3-44

3.5 Iris .......................................................................................................................................3-45 ..................................................................................................................................3-46

(1) .............................................................................................................3-46 (2) .........................................................................................................3-47

..................................................................................................................................3-48 ON/OFF ..................................................................................................................3-49 ON/OFF ....................................................................................................3-50

3.6 Zoom ..................................................................................................................................3-51 ON/OFF ..................................................................................................................3-52 F-Hold ON/OFF ............................................................................................................................3-53 ............................................................................................................3-54 ............................................................................................................3-55 ............................................................................................................3-56 .......................................................................................................................3-57 ............................................................................................................3-58

4

..............................................................................................3-59 ..............................................................................................3-60 .....................................................................................................3-61 / ................................................3-62 ..........................................................................................................................3-63

3.7 Focus ..................................................................................................................................3-65 A .......................................................................3-66

3.8 Info .....................................................................................................................................3-67 ..................................................................................................................................3-68 ............................................................................................................................................3-69 / .........................................................................................................3-71 ..............................................................................................................................3-72

3.9 Fol. ......................................................................................................................................3-75 Iris,Zoom,Focus ..................................................................................................3-76

4.

...........................................................................................................................

5

6

1.

2.

1.

2.

3.

4.

5.

1.

2.

3.

4.

5.

7

1.

1.

1.

2.

1.

1.

8

1.

2.

3.

4.

5.

6.

146-8501 108-8011 3-30-2 2-16-6

9

2.9 Frame Preset1

(1) Frame Preset1

R

1 4

2

3

4

Frame1

A

*

*

Top

A

[ I-Gain ] [Trk]OFF Shtl VTRA 1

FRM1A 2

V

RETR

[ ]MENU 1

PRE FAST

Set

Set

1

[ I-Tq ] H [ Z.M. ] [ Frm1 ] [ Frm2 ]

FRM1A 2 RETR

[ ]MENU

Frame1: Preset

PRE

Focus: OFF Zoom: ON

Frame1: Preset

FAST

Focus: OFF Zoom: ON

(D)

(D)

Set

PRE FAST

MENU Set4 [ Frm1 ]

2.9 Frame Preset1 Frame Preset1

2-19

+

2-5 3-4

PRE 3-42

[ Frm1 ]

T O P

10

A

IRSE R

IASE AA

R R

Frame1

FAST

Top

A

R

11

DISPLAY

1 1

2

5

PUSH SetSet

[ I-Gain ] [Trk]OFF Shtl VTRA 1

FRM1A 2

V

RETR

[ ]MENU 1

DISPLAY

DISPLAY

DISPLAY

1

2

3

4

[ I-Gain ] [Trk]OFF Shtl VTRA 1

FRM1A 2

V

RETR

[ ]MENU 1

2-2

Point 2 Fol.

Point

OFF

12

3-6

ResetAll User

User: AllUser:

1

y/n y/n

1-1

1

1-2

1.1

1.1

Top

Top Fig1-1

14 8 Fig1-2

1. MENU

2.

3.

4. ON/OFF

5. AUX1

6. VTR

7. AUX2

8. RET

9. Frame Preset1

10. Frame Preset2

11.

12.

13. A/M

14.

[ I-Gain ] [Trk]OFF Shtl VTRA 1

FRM1A 2

V

RETR

[ ]MENU 1

Fig1-1

Top

2. Top

Fig1-2

[ Frm1 ] [ Frm2 ] [ ]MENU 1

NormAM Zoom [ Z.M. ][ I-Tq ] H

33 3 Top

MENU

Top 14

1-3

1.1

MENU

3. MENU

1. User ......... Fig1-3 2. Switch .......... Fig1-4 3. Preset ........... Fig1-5 4. Iris .......... Fig1-6 5. Zoom ........... Fig1-7 6. Focus 2 .......... Fig1-8 7. Info. ........ Fig1-9

8. Fol. ......... Fig1-10

No. : User

1 Name: ResetAll

1

User

Fig1-3

No. : User

1 Name: ResetAll

1

Switch

Fig1-4

Switch 1

VTR:V

A 1

AUX2:A 2

VTR

AUX1: FRM1 Shtl

Preset

Fig1-5

Frame1: Preset

PRE Frame2: PRE ZSpeed: 800

Iris

Fig1-6

Iris [ ] [ I-Gain ] Torque: High Comp: ON

Zoom

Fig1-7

Tracking: F-Hold: OFF

OFF

Movement

Zoom [ ]

Focus

Fig1-8

CurveMode Focus [ ]

Fol.

Fig1-10

Fol. Iris: Zoom: Focus:

0940 0527

0011

1

Info

Fig1-9

Info

Initialize CamSeri: ON

Encoder: OFF

MENU

33 3 8 R 7 MENU 1

1MENU 8 MENU

2R

Top MENU Set User

[ ]

1

2-1

2 Top

2-2

2.1 Top

2.1 Top

Top Top 14 Top 1

[ I-Gain ] [Trk]OFF

Shtl VTRA 1

FRM1A 2

V

RETR

[ ]MENU 1

[ I-Tq ] H [ Z.M. ]

[ Frm2 ][ Frm1 ]

ZoomNormAM

Top

9 10

11 12

13 14

1

AUX1 Shtl

ShtlA 1

1

3

5

7

5

4

6

8

2

ft

m

1x

2x

A 1

A 2

V

R

AM

14

13

8

5

6

7

2-3

2.1 Top

VTR

Frame Preset2

AUX1

AUX2

A/M

Frame Preset1

(User 0 9) (User A) (User A)

0 9 10

A

ON

AUX1

VTR VTR

AUX2 1

ON/OFF 2-14

VTR 2-16

AUX1 2-15

AUX2 2-17

3. MENU 3-1

1

2

3

4

9

10

11

12[Trk]

A 1

A 2

V

R

[ ]

MENUMENU

[ I-Tq ] [ I-Gain ]

[ Frm2 ]

[ Frm1 ]

AM

RET

Frame Preset2 2-22

2-12

2-29

A/M 2-28

2-25

Frame Preset1 2-19

RET 2-18

RET

1 /

ON/OFF

1 /

ON/OFF

A/M

2-4 2-5 2-6 2-9

2-26

[ Z.M. ]

13

14

5

7

6

8

2-4

2.2

2.2

[ ]

User 1 9 9 User 1 9

User 0 User 1 9User OFF User 0 3-26 User 0 F-Hold

User ( ) ( )

VTRRETIRIS A/MIRIS INST

AUX1AUX2MEMO

2-6 2-11

2-5

2.2 - (User 0 9)

(User 0 9) [ ]

Top User 0 9UserA User 0 9 MENU 3. MENU User A

[ ] 1

[ ] 2

Set

1

2

Set4

3

[ I-Gain ] [Trk]OFF Shtl VTRA 1

FRM1A 2

V

RETR

[ ]MENU 1

[ I-Gain ] [Trk]OFF Shtl VTRA 1

FRM1A 2

V

RETR

[ ]MENU 1

[ I-Gain ] [Trk]OFF Shtl VTRA 1

FRM1A 2

V

RETR

[ ]MENU 2

Top

SetMENU [ ] 1 Set

OFF

(D)

0 (D)1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 A

2-6

2.2 - (User A)

(User A)[ ]

User ( ) ( )

VTRRETIRIS A/MIRIS INST

AUX1AUX2MEMO

Unlock Lock

[ ] A I G : 5 0 I G : 5 0 [ ] Lock

Unlock

Lock Unlock 8

2-7

2.2 - (User A)

1

[ I-Gain ] [Trk]OFF Shtl VTRA 1

FRM1A 2

V

RETR

[ ]MENU 1

Set

Set

Set

3

4

5

2 A

[ I-Gain ] [Trk]OFF Shtl VTRA 1

FRM1A 2

V

RETR

[ ]MENU 1

[ ] A I G : 5 0

[ ] A I G : 5 0

Unlock

AnalogMode Lock / Unlock

Top

MENU [ ] 1 [ ] ASet Set Set

OFF

(D)

0 (D)1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 A

(1)

[ ]

2-8

2.2 - (User A)

(D)

(D) A B C D E F G H I J K L M N O P Q R S T U V W X Y Z a b c d e f g h i j k l m n o p q r s t u v w x y z 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9

8

(D)

(D) Unlock Lock

MENU [ ] 1 [ ] ASet Set Set

Set Set

1

Unlock

[ I-Gain ] [Trk]OFF Shtl VTRA 1

FRM1A 2

V

RETR

[ ]MENU 1

Set

Set

Set

3

2 A

[ I-Gain ] [Trk]OFF Shtl VTRA 1

FRM1A 2

V

RETR

[ ]MENU 1

[ ] A I G : 5 0

EnterPassword

AnalogMode Lock / Unlock

4

Set

Set

5

SET

6

7 Lock

EnterPassword

Lock OK? y/n

[ ] Lock I G : 5 0

Top

(2)

[ ]

2-9

2.2 - (User A)

(User A) [ ]

Unlock Lock

[ ] A I G : 5 0 I G : 5 0 [ ] Lock

Unlock

(1)

1 IG: Set

[ ] A

3 Set

2

[A] [Lock]

I G : 50

I G : 55

[ ] A

I G : 5 0

I G : 5 5

SetSet

01 99

I G : 5 0

User ( ) ( )

VTRRETIRIS A/MIRIS INST

AUX1AUX2MEMO

2-10

2.2 - (User A)

(2)

1 Set

[ ] A I G : 5 0

[ ] A I G : 5 0

3 Set

2

[ I-Gain ] [Trk]OFF Shtl VTRA 1

FRM1A 2

V

RETR

[ ]MENU 0

[ I-Gain ] [Trk]OFF Shtl VTRA 1

FRM1A 2

V

RETR

[ ]MENU 0

I :

(Unlock )

SetSet I G : 5 0

[ ]

2-11

2.2 - (User A)

1 Set

[ ] Lock I G : 5 0

[ ] Lock I G : 5 0

2

I :

EnterPassword

Set3

SET

Set4

Set

Set

5

EnterPassword

Unlock OK? y/n

[ ] A I G : 5 0

[ ] A I G : 5 0

6

[ I-Gain ] [Trk]OFF Shtl VTRA 1

FRM1A 2

V

RETR

[ ]MENU 1

(Lock )

Set Set Set Set

Set

(D)

8

I G : 5 0

(D) A B C D E F G H I J K L M N O P Q R S T U V W X Y Z a b c d e f g h i j k l m n o p q r s t u v w x y z 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9

[ ]

2-12

2.3 -

2

(1)

--> A/M AUTO

--> AUTO

3-6

[ I-Gain ] [Trk]OFF Shtl VTRA 1

FRM1A 2

V

RETR

[ ]MENU 1

2 Set

5 Set

4

I-Gain

Auto

A

Top

I-Gain

3

1

[ I-Gain ] Iris

Remote: 90 Auto: 73

[ ]

[ I-Gain ] Iris

Remote: 90 Auto: 73

[ ]

[ I-Gain ] Iris

Remote: 90 Auto: 71

[ ]

[ I-Gain ] [Trk]OFF Shtl VTRA 1

FRM1A 2

V

RETR

[ ]MENU 1

A

Set

01 99

MENU Set[ I-Gain ]

2.3 [ I-Gain ]

2-13

2.3 -

(2)

--> A/M AUTO

--> Remote

[ I-Gain ] [Trk]OFF Shtl VTRA 1

FRM1A 2

V

RETR

[ ]MENU 1

2 Set

5 Set

4

I-Gain

Remote

A

Top

I-Gain

3 2

1

[ I-Gain ] Iris

Remote: 90 Auto: 48

[ ]

[ I-Gain ] Iris

Remote: 90 Auto: 48

[ ]

[ I-Gain ] Iris

Remote: 80 Auto: 48

[ ]

[ I-Gain ] [Trk]OFF Shtl VTRA 1

FRM1A 2

V

RETR

[ ]MENU 1

A

90

Set

01 99

MENU Set 2[ I-Gain ]

3-6

[ I-Gain ]

2-14

2.4 ON/OFF

ON/OFF

1

2

4

3

[ I-Gain ] [Trk]OFF Shtl VTRA 1

FRM1A 2

V

RETR

[ ]MENU 1

Set

Set

[Trk]OFF

[Trk]ON

[ I-Gain ] [Trk]OFF Shtl VTRA 1

FRM1A 2

V

RETR

[ ]MENU 1

[ I-Gain ] [Trk]ON Shtl VTRA 1

FRM1A 2

V

RETR

[ ]MENU 1

ON OFF

Top

(D)

(D)

Set

OFF ON

MENU Set[Trk]OFF

2.4 ON/OFF

2-5 3-4

[Trk]

2-15

2.5 AUX1

AUX1

Set

1 2

2

Set4

3

[ I-Gain ] [Trk]OFF Shtl VTRA 1

FRM1A 2

V

RETR

[ ]MENU 1

[ I-Gain ] [Trk]OFF Shtl VTRA 1

FRM1A 2

V

RETR

[ ]MENU 1

ShtlA 1

VTRA 1

[ I-Gain ] [Trk]OFF VTR VTRA 1

FRM1A 2

V

RETR

[ ]MENU 1

Top

Set

(D)

2

Shtl(D) NON VTR RET FRM1 FRM2 Sped

VTR RET Framing Preset1 Framing Preset2 Speed Preset

MENU SetShtlA 1

2.5 AUX1

2-5 3-4

A 1

2-16

2.6 VTR

VTR

Set

1 2 1

2

Set4

[ I-Gain ] [Trk]OFF Shtl VTRA 1

FRM1A 2

V

RETR

[ ]MENU 1

[ I-Gain ] [Trk]OFF Shtl VTRA 1

FRM1A 2

V

RETR

[ ]MENU 1

[ I-Gain ] [Trk]OFF Shtl RETA 1

FRM1A 2

V

RETR

[ ]MENU 1

VTRV

RETV

3

Top

2 Set

(D)

(D) ShtlVTR RET FRM1 FRM2 Sped

VTR RET Framing Preset1 Framing Preset2 Speed Preset

MENU SetVTRV

2.6 VTR V

2-5 3-4

2-17

2.7 AUX2

AUX2

Set

1 3

2

[ I-Gain ] [Trk]OFF Shtl VTRA 1

FRM1A 2

V

RETR

[ ]MENU 1

[ Frm1 ] [ Frm2 ]

Shtl VTRA 1

FRM1A 2

V

RETR

[ ]MENU 1

[ Frm1 ] [ Frm2 ]

Shtl VTRA 1

ShtlA 2

V

RETR

[ ]MENU 1

FRM1A 2

ShtlA 2

Set4

3

Top

3 SetMENU SetA 1 FRM1A 2

(D)

Shtl(D) NON VTR RETFRM1 FRM2 Sped

VTR RETFraming Preset1 Framing Preset2 Speed Preset

2.7 AUX2

2-5 3-4

A 2

2-18

2.8 RET

RET

Set

1 3 1

2

Set4

[ I-Gain ] [Trk]OFF Shtl VTRA 1

FRM1A 2

V

RETR

[ ]MENU 1

RETR

FRM2R

1

[ Frm1 ] [ Frm2 ]

Shtl VTRA 1

FRM1A 2

V

RETR

[ ]MENU

1

[ Frm1 ] [ Frm2 ]

Shtl VTRA 1

FRM1A 2

V

FRM2R

[ ]MENU

3

Top

3 Set

(D)

(D) Shtl VTRRET FRM1 FRM2 Sped

VTRRET Framing Preset1 Framing Preset2 Speed Preset

MENU SetA 1 RETR

2.8 RET R

2-5 3-4

2-19

2.9 Frame Preset1 - Frame Preset1

(1) Frame Preset1

PRE3-42

1 4

2

3

4

Frame1

A

Top

A

[ I-Gain ] [Trk]OFF Shtl VTRA 1

FRM1A 2

V

RETR

[ ]MENU 1

PRE FAST

Set

Set

1

[ I-Tq ] H [ Z.M. ] [ Frm1 ] [ Frm2 ]

FRM1A 2 RETR

[ ]MENU

Frame1: Preset

PRE

Focus: OFF Zoom: ON

Frame1: Preset

FAST

Focus: OFF Zoom: ON

R

(D)

(D)

Set

PRE FAST

MENU Set4 [ Frm1 ]

2.9 Frame Preset1

2-5 3-4

[ Frm1 ]

2-20

2.9 Frame Preset1 - Frame Preset1 ON/OFF

(2) Frame Preset1 ON/OFF

1 4

2

3

4

Zoom

ON OFF

5 A

Top

[ I-Gain ] [Trk]OFF Shtl VTRA 1

FRM1A 2

V

RETR

[ ]MENU 1

Frame1: PRE

Focus: OFF Zoom: ON

Preset

Frame1: PRE

Focus: OFF Zoom: OFF

Preset

A

Set

Set

1

[ I-Tq ] H [ Z.M. ] [ Frm1 ] [ Frm2 ]

FRM1A 2 RETR

[ ]MENU

Frame1: Preset

PRE

Focus: OFF Zoom: ON R

(D)

(D)

Set

ON OFF

MENU Set4 [ Frm1 ]

[ Frm1 ]

2-5 3-4

2-21

2.9 Frame Preset1 - Frame Preset1 ON/OFF "A"

(3) Frame Preset1 ON/OFF A

A R Focus

1 4

2

3 2

Focus

5 A

Top

A

[ I-Gain ] [Trk]OFF Shtl VTRA 1

FRM1A 2

V

RETR

[ ]MENU 1

Frame1: Preset

PRE

Focus: OFF Zoom: ON

Frame1: Preset

PRE

Focus: ON Zoom: ON

1

[ I-Tq ] H [ Z.M. ] [ Frm1 ] [ Frm2 ]

FRM1A 2 RETR

[ ]MENU

Set

Set

Frame1: Preset

PRE

Focus: OFF Zoom: ON

4 ON

OFF

(D)

(D)

Set

ONOFF

MENU Set4 [ Frm1 ] 2

[ Frm1 ]

2-5 3-4

2-22

2.10 Frame Preset2 - Frame Preset2

(1) Frame Preset2

PRE3-42

1 4 1

2

3

4

Frame2

A

Top

A

[ I-Gain ] [Trk]OFF Shtl VTRA 1

FRM1A 2

V

RETR

[ ]MENU 1

PRE FAST

1

[ I-Tq ] H [ Z.M. ] [ Frm1 ]

FRM1A 2 RETR

[ ]MENU

[ Frm2 ]

Set

Set

Frame2: Preset

PRE

Focus: OFF Zoom: ON

Frame2: Preset

FAST

Focus: OFF Zoom: ON

R

(D)

(D)

Set

PRE FAST

MENU Set4 [ Frm2 ]

2.10 Frame Preset2

2-5 3-4

[ Frm2 ]

2-23

2.10 Frame Preset2 - Frame Preset2 ON/OFF

(2) Frame Preset2 ON/OFF

1 4 1

2

3

4

Zoom

ON OFF

5 A

Top

[ I-Gain ] [Trk]OFF Shtl VTRA 1

FRM1A 2

V

RETR

[ ]MENU 1

Frame2: PRE

Focus: OFF Zoom: ON

Preset

Frame2: PRE

Focus: OFF Zoom: OFF

Preset

A

1

[ I-Tq ] H [ Z.M. ] [ Frm1 ]

FRM1A 2 RETR

[ ]MENU

[ Frm2 ]

Set

Set

Frame2: Preset

PRE

Focus: OFF Zoom: ON

R

(D)

(D)

Set

ON OFF

MENU Set4 [ Frm2 ]

[ Frm2 ]

2-5 3-4

2-24

2.10 Frame Preset2 - Frame Preset2 ON/OFF

(3) Frame Preset2 ON/OFF A

A R Focus

1 4 1

2

3 2

Focus

5 A

Top

A

[ I-Gain ] [Trk]OFF Shtl VTRA 1

FRM1A 2

V

RETR

[ ]MENU 1

Frame2: Preset

PRE

Focus: OFF Zoom: ON

Frame2: Preset

PRE

Focus: ON Zoom: ON

Set

Set

Frame2: Preset

PRE

Focus: OFF Zoom: ON

4 ON

OFF

1

[ I-Tq ] H [ Z.M. ] [ Frm1 ]

FRM1A 2 RETR

[ ]MENU

[ Frm2 ]

(D)

(D)

Set

ONOFF

MENU Set4 [ Frm2 ] 2

[ Frm2 ]

2-5 3-4

2-25

2.11

[ I-Gain ] [Trk]OFF Shtl VTRA 1

FRM1A 2

V

RETR

[ ]MENU 1

2 Set

4 Set

1 5

[ Frm1 ] [ Frm2 ] [ ]MENU 1

NormAM Zoom [ Z.M. ][ I-Tq ] H

[ Frm1 ] [ Frm2 ] [ ]MENU 1

NormAM Zoom [ Z.M. ][ I-Tq ] L

[ I-Tq ] H

[ I-Tq ] L

3 H L

Top

(D)

(D)

Set

H L

MENU Set5 [ I-Tq ] H

2.11

2-5 3-4

[ I-Tq ]

2-26

2.12 -

(1)

2

4

CurveMode

Seesaw

A

3

5

[ I-Tq ] H [ Frm1 ] [ Frm2 ]

[ ]MENU 1

NormAM

[ Z.M. ]

[ I-Gain ] [Trk]OFF Shtl VTRA 1

FRM1A 2

V

RETR

[ ]MENU 1

Zoom

Set

Set

CurveMode Zoom

Demand: Seesaw: 5

5

[ ]

CurveMode Zoom

Demand: Seesaw:

[ ]

D5 5

CurveMode Zoom

Demand: Seesaw:

[ ]

3 5

A

Top

CurveMode

1 5 1

D

[ Z.M. ]MENU Set Set5

1 2 3 4 D5 6 7 8 9

(1)

(9)

MAX

2.12 [ Z.M. ]

2-5 3-4

2-27

2.12 -

(2)

2

4

CurveMode

A

3 2

5

CurveMode Zoom

Demand: Seesaw:

[ ]

Demand

[ I-Tq ] H [ Frm1 ] [ Frm2 ]

[ ]MENU 1

NormAM

[ Z.M. ]

1 5 1

[ I-Gain ] [Trk]OFF Shtl VTRA 1

FRM1A 2

V

RETR

[ ]MENU 1

Zoom

Set

Set

CurveMode Zoom

Demand: Seesaw: 5

5

[ ]

CurveMode Zoom

Demand: Seesaw:

[ ]

D5

8 5

5

A

CurveMode

Top

[ Z.M. ] 2 SetMENU Set

D

1 2 3 4 D5 6 7 8 9

5

(1)

(9)

MAX

[ Z.M. ]

2-5 3-4

2-28

2.13 A/M

A/M

[ I-Gain ] [Trk]OFF Shtl VTRA 1

FRM1A 2

V

RETR

[ ]MENU 1

NormAM

ReveAM

Set

1 6

2

Set4

3

Top

[ Frm1 ] [ Frm2 ] [ ]MENU 1

Zoom [ Z.M. ][ I-Tq ] H

NormAM

[ Frm1 ] [ Frm2 ] [ ]MENU 1

Zoom [ Z.M. ][ I-Tq ] H

ReveAM

(D)

(D)

Set

Norm Reve

A Auto / M Manual A Manual / M Auto A Auto / M Auto A Manual / M Manual

Auto Manu

Auto Only Manual Only

MENU Set6 NormAM

2.13 A/M AM

2-5 3-4

2-29

2.14

ZoomIris

1 2 MANUAL 3TELE OPEN WIDE CLOSE 43-59

[ I-Gain ] [Trk]OFF Shtl VTRA 1

FRM1A 2

V

RETR

[ ]MENU 1

Zoom

Iris

Set

1 6 1

2

Set4

Zoom Iris

3

Top

[ I-Tq ] H [ Frm1 ] [ Frm2 ]

[ ]MENU 1

NormAM Zoom [ Z.M. ]

[ I-Tq ] H [ Frm1 ] [ Frm2 ]

[ ]MENU 1

NormAM Iris [ Z.M. ]

(D)

(D)

Set

Zoom Iris

Zoom Iris

MENU Set6 Zoom

2.14

2-5 3-4

3-1

3 MENU

3-2

3.1 MENU

3.1 MENU

[ I-Gain ] [Trk]OFF Shtl VTRA 1

FRM1A 2

V

RETR

[ ]MENU 1 [ ] A I G : 5 0

Iris [ ] [ I-Gain ] Torque: High Comp: ON

Iris

Fol. Iris: Zoom: Focus:

0940 0527

0011

1 Fol.

Switch 1

VTR:V

A 1

AUX2:A 2

VTR

AUX1: FRM1 Shtl

Switch

No. : User

1 Name: ResetAll

1

User

MENU

Top

Frame1: Preset

PRE Frame2: PRE ZSpeed: 800

Preset

: Go Top : Back

Go Top

Set

Set

Go Top

User

Top

Set

Set

1 2

3

4

56

7

8

Switch 3-27

Zoom 3-51

Info 3-67Preset 3-35

Focus 3-65

User 3-31

2

3

5

6

7

Iris 3-454 Fol. 3-758

Tracking: F-Hold: OFF

OFF

Movement

Zoom [ ] Zoom

CurveMode Focus [ ]

Focus

Info Encoder: Initialize

OFF

Info

(A)

(A )

(0 9)

(0 9)

User A (A) (0 9) User

CamSeri: ON

MENU 33 3 MENU User Switch Preset Iris Zoom Focus A Info Fol. 8 R 7 Top MENU Set User 7

MENU 8 MENU

Top Top

3-3

3.2 User

3.2 User

3

User 1 9 9 User 1 9

User 0 User 1 9User OFF User 0 3-26 User 0 F-Hold

User ( ) ( )

VTRRETIRIS A/MIRIS INST

AUX1AUX2MEMO

3-19 3-25

(User 0 9) ............................................................................................................3-4

........................................................................................................................3-5

(1) 1 ..............................................................................................3-6

(2) .............................................................................................3-7

1 1 .............................................................................3-8

(1) .......................................................3-10

(2) .......................................................3-12

(3) ................................................................................................................3-14

(User 0 9) ...........................................................................................................3-15

(User A) ...............................................................................................................3-19

(User A) ...............................................................................................................3-23

....................................................................................................................................3-26

Top

Top Top

Top

Top

3-4

3.2 User - (User 0 9)

(User 0 9)

User

Top

User

2

[ I-Gain ] [Trk]OFF Shtl VTRA 1

FRM1A 2

V

RETR

[ ]MENU 1

3

No.

1 Set

No. : User

1 Name: ResetAll

1

No. : User

Name: ResetAll

1 1

No. : User

Name: ResetAll

2 2

SetMENU Set User 1

OFF

0 (D)1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 A

(D)

User 0 9User A User A3-19 3-25 User No.

Top

3-5

3.2 User -

2 2

3

[ I-Gain ] [Trk]OFF Shtl VTRA 1

FRM1A 2

V

RETR

[ ]MENU 1

1 Set

Set

Name User

Name:

1 1 -

Set5 Name

Name User

Name: A

1

No. : User

1 Name: ResetAll

1

No. : User

Name: ResetAll

1 1

No. : User

Name: ResetAll

1 1

A

User

Top

User

Name

4

Name

SetMENU

(D)

Set User 1 Set2

8

(D) A B C D E F G H I J K L M N O P Q R S T U V W X Y Z a b c d e f g h i j k l m n o p q r s t u v w x y z 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9

2-5 3-4

Top

3-6

3.2 User - 1

User

2 3

3

4

[ I-Gain ] [Trk]OFF Shtl VTRA 1

FRM1A 2

V

RETR

[ ]MENU 1

Name: User

ResetAll Copy

1

User 1 Reset Now.

ResetAll User

User: AllUser:

1

y/n y/n

Name: User

ResetAll Copy

1

1 Set

Set

Reset

Set6

Reset

5 y

No. : User

1 Name: ResetAll

1

ResetAll User

User: AllUser:

1

y/n y/n

ResetAll User

User: AllUser:

1

y/n y/n

A

A

Top

User

Reset

Reset

Reset

ResetAll

SetMENU Set User 1 Set3

(1) 1 1

1 5

F-Hold

2-5 3-4

3-7

3.2 User -

User

2 3

3

4 2

[ I-Gain ] [Trk]OFF Shtl VTRA 1

FRM1A 2

V

RETR

[ ]MENU 1

Name: User

ResetAll Copy

1

All User Reset Now.

ResetAll User

User: AllUser:

1

y/n y/n

Name: User

ResetAll Copy

1

ResetAll User

User: AllUser:

1

y/n y/n

1 Set

Set

Reset

Set6

Reset

5 y

No. : User

1 Name: ResetAll

1

A

A

Top

User

Reset

Reset

Reset

ResetAll

ResetAll User

User: AllUser:

1

y/n y/n

SetMENU Set User 1 Set3 2

(2)

1 5

F-Hold

3-8

3.2 User - 1 1

3

6

5

[ I-Gain ] [Trk]OFF Shtl VTRA 1

FRM1A 2

V

RETR

[ ]MENU 1

Copy User

To No. : Copy:

1

y/n 1

Copy User

To No. : Copy:

1

y/n 3

Copy User

To No. : Copy:

1

3 y/n

ResetAll User

Copy ToOtherLens

1

Copy User

To No. : Copy:

1

1 y/n

1 Set

2 4

4

Set

Copy y (YES), n (NO)

To No.

No. : User

1 Name: ResetAll

1 User

Copy

Top

User

A

Copy

Copy

1 7

2-5 3-4

1 1

3-9

3.2 User - 1 1

Set

MENU Set User 1 Set4

ResetAll User

Copy ToOtherLens

1

y

Set8 A

7

Copy User

To No. : Copy:

1

3 y/n

3-10

3.2 User -

1 3-12 2

(1)

3

[ I-Gain ] [Trk]OFF Shtl VTRA 1

FRM1A 2

V

RETR

[ ]MENU 1

ToOtherLens User

Connect:

1

y/n

ToOtherLens User

Connect:

1

y/n

ToOtherLens User

Connect:

1

y/n

1 Set

2 5

4

Set

Set

Connect y (YES), n (NO)

y (YES) 5

No. : User

1 Name: ResetAll

1 User

ToOtherLens

Top

User

A

ResetAll User

Copy ToOtherLens

1

B

ToOtherLens

ToOtherLens

ToOtherLens User

UserCopy : AllCopy :

1

y/n y/n

6 B

7

1 12

1. 20P-20P

20 2. 3.

2-5 3-4

3-11

3.2 User -

Set

SetMENU

Set

Set User 1 Set5

8

ToOtherLens User

To No. : Copy:

1

1 y/n

10

ToOtherLens User

To No. : Copy:

1

y/n 1

ToOtherLens User

To No. : Copy:

1

y/n 3

11

9 To No.

Copy y (YES), n (NO)

Set13

12

Now Data Copy Please Wait...

A ResetAll

User

Copy ToOtherLens

1

A

Set

y (YES)

ToOtherLens User

To No. : Copy:

1

y/n 3

ToOtherLens User

To No. : Copy:

1

y/n 3

2

1

ToOtherLens User

UserCopy : AllCopy :

1

y/n y/n

1 Set

2

3-14 (3)

3-12

3.2 User -

(2)

3

[ I-Gain ] [Trk]OFF Shtl VTRA 1

FRM1A 2

V

RETR

[ ]MENU 1

ResetAll User

Copy ToOtherLens

1

ToOtherLens User

Connect:

1

y/n

ToOtherLens User

Connect:

1

y/n

ToOtherLens User

Connect:

1

y/n

1 Set

2 5

Set

4

Set

Connect y (YES), n (NO)

y (YES)

No. : User

1 Name: ResetAll

1 User

ToOtherLens

Top

User

A

ToOtherLens

ToOtherLens

5

6

1 10

1. 20P-20P

20 2. 3.

3-13

3.2 User -

Set

AllCopy y (YES), n (NO)

B

y/n

9

ToOtherLens User

ToAllUser Copy:

1

y/n

AllCopy AllCopy

Copy y (YES), n (NO)

Set11

10

Now Data Copy Please Wait...

A ResetAll

User

Copy ToOtherLens

1

A

B

7 2

y (YES)

ToOtherLens User

ToAllUser Copy:

1

y/n

ToOtherLens User

ToAllUser Copy:

1

y/n

2

1

8

ToOtherLens User

UserCopy : AllCopy :

1

y/n y/n

ToOtherLens User

UserCopy : AllCopy :

1

y/n

Set

SetMENU Set User 1 Set

Set

5

2

1 Set

2

3-14 (3)

3-14

3.2 User -

(3)

Lens Connect Error!!

20P-20P 20P-20P

OFF

20P-20P SW

A

20P-20P

Copy Error!!

User Copy ToOtherLens

1

A

Access: Unlock

3-15

3.2 User - (User 0 9)

3-19 3-22

Lock

[ I-Gain ] [Trk]OFF Shtl VTRA 1

FRM1A 2

V

RETR

[ ]MENU 1

2 6

No. : User

1 Name: ResetAll

1

Top

User User

User Copy ToOtherLens

1

Access: Unlock Set3

Set1

Unlock Lock

[ ] Lock [ I-Gain ] [Trk]OFF

Shtl VTRA 1

FRM1A 2

V

RETR

[ ]MENU 1 [ I-Gain ] [Trk]OFF

Shtl VTRA 1

FRM1A 2

V

RETR

MENU

(User 0 9)

Lock Unlock 8

Lock (ShtlShot FramePreset PresetSpeed) ZoomTrack ON/OFF AutoIrisGain F-Hold

User No. 0 9 Unlock User No. Lock Lock

3-16

3.2 User - (User 0 9)

Set

(D)

Set Set Set6 DISPLAY

8

(D)

(D) Unlock Lock

(D) A B C D E F G H I J K L M N O P Q R S T U V W X Y Z a b c d e f g h i j k l m n o p q r s t u v w x y z 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9

Set

Set

4

SET

EnterPassword

EnterPassword

Lock OK? y/n

5

6 Lock

User Copy

1

ToOtherLens Access: Lock

Lock Unlock 8

3-17

3.2 User - (User 0 9)

Unlock Unlock

Unlock 1

Set Set[ ] Lock

(D)

(D) Unlock Lock

2

[ ] 1

Top

1 MENU

MENU [ I-Gain ] [Trk]OFF

Shtl VTRA 1

FRM1A 2

V

RETR

[ ] Lock

MENU [ I-Gain ] [Trk]OFF

Shtl VTRA 1

FRM1A 2

V

RETR

Set

Set

EnterPassword

EnterPassword

Unlock OK? y/n

5

6 Lock User No.

3

Set4 Lock Unlock

(Lock User No.

[ I-Gain ] [Trk]OFF Shtl VTRA 1

FRM1A 2

V

RETR

MENU

[ I-Gain ] [Trk]OFF Shtl VTRA 1

FRM1A 2

V

RETR

[ ] Lock

[ ] Lock

3-18

3.2 User - (User 0 9)

[ I-Gain ] [Trk]OFF Shtl VTRA 1

FRM1A 2

V

RETR

MENU [ ] Lock

2 6

No. : User

1 Name: ResetAll

1

Top

User User

1 Set

1

1

User Copy ToOtherLens Access: Lock

Set3

Set

Set

4 Lock Unlock

EnterPassword

EnterPassword

Unlock OK? y/n

5

6 Unlock

User Copy ToOtherLens Access: Unlock

Unlock 2

SetSet Set Set6 DISPLAY

3-19

3.2 User - (User A)

User ( ) ( )

VTRRETIRIS A/MIRIS INST

AUX1AUX2MEMO

Unlock Lock

[ ] A I G : 5 0 I G : 5 0 [ ] Lock

Unlock

(User A)

Lock Unlock 8

Top

3-20

3.2 User - (User A)

(1)

User

Top

User

2

[ I-Gain ] [Trk]OFF Shtl VTRA 1

FRM1A 2

V

RETR

[ ]MENU 1

3 A

No.

Unlock

[ ] A I G : 5 0

AnalogMode Lock / Unlock

1 Set

4 Set

5 Set

6

No. : User

1 Name: ResetAll

1

No. : User

Name: ResetAll

1 1

No. : User

Name: ResetAll

A A

SetMENU SetSet User 1

OFF

0 (D)1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 A

(D)

3-21

3.2 User - (User A)

(2)

User

Top

User

2

[ I-Gain ] [Trk]OFF Shtl VTRA 1

FRM1A 2

V

RETR

[ ]MENU 1

3 A

No.

EnterPassword

Set6

SET

AnalogMode Lock / Unlock

Set5

EnterPassword

Lock OK? y/n

1 Set

4 Set

Unlock

No. : User

1 Name: ResetAll

1

No. : User

Name: ResetAll

1 1

No. : User

Name: ResetAll

A A

3-22

3.2 User - (User A)

8 Lock

[ ] LockI G : 5 0

Set7

Set

(D)

Set DISPLAY

8

(D)

(D) Unlock Lock

OFF

0 (D)1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 A

SetMENU SetSet User 1

(D) A B C D E F G H I J K L M N O P Q R S T U V W X Y Z a b c d e f g h i j k l m n o p q r s t u v w x y z 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9

Lock Unlock 8

3-23

3.2 User - (User A)

Unlock Lock

[ ] A I G : 5 0 I G : 5 0 [ ] Lock

Unlock

(1)

1 IG: Set

[ ] A

3 Set

2

[A] [Lock]

I G : 50

I G : 55

[ ] A

I G : 5 0

I G : 5 5

SetSet

01 99

I G : 5 0

User ( ) ( )

VTRRETIRIS A/MIRIS INST

AUX1AUX2MEMO

(User A) Top

3-24

3.2 User -- (User A)

(2)

1 Set

[ ] A I G : 5 0

[ ] A I G : 5 0

3 Set

2

[ I-Gain ] [Trk]OFF Shtl VTRA 1

FRM1A 2

V

RETR

[ ]MENU 0

[ I-Gain ] [Trk]OFF Shtl VTRA 1

FRM1A 2

V

RETR

[ ]MENU 0

I :

(Unlock )

SetSet I G : 5 0

3-25

3.2 User -- (User A)

1 Set

[ ] Lock I G : 5 0

[ ] Lock I G : 5 0

2

I :

EnterPassword

Set3

SET

Set4

Set

Set

5

EnterPassword

Unlock OK? y/n

[ ] A I G : 5 0

[ ] A I G : 5 0

6

[ I-Gain ] [Trk]OFF Shtl VTRA 1

FRM1A 2

V

RETR

[ ]MENU 1

(Lock )

Set Set Set Set

Set

(D)

8

I G : 5 0

(D) A B C D E F G H I J K L M N O P Q R S T U V W X Y Z a b c d e f g h i j k l m n o p q r s t u v w x y z 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9

1

User User0 User 0 Reset Now User1 9 Escape To User 0

Set

2 Top

User 0 Reset Now

User 0

Escape To User 0

User 1 9

Top

[ I-Gain ] [Trk]OFF Shtl VTRA 1

FRM1A 2

V

RETR

[ ]MENU 1

[ I-Gain ] [Trk]OFF Shtl VTRA 1

FRM1A 2

V

RETR

[ ]MENU 0

2SetandDISPLAY[ ]

User 0 9 User A User 0

(1) User 0 9

(2) User A ( )

1 Set

2 Top

Escape To User 0 Top

[ I-Gain ] [Trk]OFF Shtl VTRA 1

FRM1A 2

V

RETR

[ ]MENU 0

[ ] A I G : 5 0

3.2 User -

3-26

F-Hold

Lock

3-27

AUX1 ............................................................................................... 3-28

AUX2 ............................................................................................... 3-29

VTR ................................................................................................. 3-30

RET ................................................................................................. 3-31

A/M ........................................................................................................ 3-32

......................................................................................................... 3-33

Top Top

Top

Top

Top

Top

Top

Top

3.3 Switch

3.3 Switch

3-28

3.3 Switch -AUX1

(D)

Shtl(D) NON VTR RET FRM1 FRM2 Sped

VTR RET Framing Preset1 Framing Preset2 Speed Preset

MENU Set Switch 1

Switch

2

3

[ I-Gain ] [Trk]OFF Shtl VTRA 1

FRM1A 2

V

RETR

[ ]MENU 1

1 Set

AUX1

Switch

Top

Switch 1

VTR:V VTR

AUX1:A 1

AUX2:A 2 FRM1 Shtl

Switch 1

VTR:V VTR

AUX1:A 1

AUX2:A 2 FRM1 VTR

Switch 1

VTR:V

A 1

AUX2:A 2

VTR

AUX1: FRM1 Shtl

AUX1

AUX1

2-5 3-4

Top

3-29

3.3 Switch -AUX2

[ I-Gain ] [Trk]OFF Shtl VTRA 1

FRM1A 2

V

RETR

[ ]MENU 1

Switch

2 2

3

1 Set

AUX2

Switch

Top

Switch 1

VTR:V

A 1

AUX2:A 2

VTR

AUX1: FRM1 Shtl

Switch 1

VTR:V VTR

AUX1:A 1

AUX2:A 2

Shtl FRM1

Switch 1

VTR:V VTR

AUX1:A 1

AUX2:A 2

Shtl Sped

(D)

Shtl(D) NON VTR RETFRM1 FRM2 Sped

VTR RETFraming Preset1 Framing Preset2 Speed Preset

2MENU Set Switch 1

AUX2

AUX2

2-5 3-4

Top

3-30

3.3 Switch -VTR

[ I-Gain ] [Trk]OFF Shtl VTRA 1

FRM1A 2

V

RETR

[ ]MENU 1

Switch 1

RET:R RET

AUX2:A 2

VTR:V

FRM1 VTR

Switch 1

RET:R RET

AUX2:A 2

VTR:V

FRM1 RET

Switch

2 3

3

1 Set

VTR

Switch

Top

Switch 1

VTR:V

A 1

AUX2:A 2

VTR

AUX1: FRM1 Shtl

3MENU Set Switch 1

(D)

(D) ShtlVTR RET FRM1 FRM2 Sped

VTR RET Framing Preset1 Framing Preset2 Speed Preset

VTR

VTR

2-5 3-4

Top

3-31

3.3 Switch -RET

[ I-Gain ] [Trk]OFF Shtl VTRA 1

FRM1A 2

V

RETR

[ ]MENU 1

Switch

2 4

3

1 Set

RET

Switch

Top

Switch 1

A/M:AM Normal

VTR:V

RET:R

VTR RET

Switch 1

A/M:AM Normal

VTR:V

RET:R

VTR Sped

Switch 1

VTR:V

A 1

AUX2:A 2

VTR

AUX1: FRM1 Shtl

4MENU Set Switch 1

(D)

(D) Shtl VTRRET FRM1 FRM2 Sped

VTRRET Framing Preset1 Framing Preset2 Speed Preset

RET

RET

2-5 3-4

Top

3-32

3.3 Switch - A/M

[ I-Gain ] [Trk]OFF Shtl VTRA 1

FRM1A 2

V

RETR

[ ]MENU 1

Switch 1

SSaw: A/M:AM

RET:R RET

Zoom Normal

Switch 1

SSaw: A/M:AM

RET:R RET

Zoom Revers

Switch

2 5

3

1 Set

AM

Switch

Top

Switch 1

VTR:V

A 1

AUX2:A 2

VTR

AUX1: FRM1 Shtl

5MENU Set Switch 1

(D)

(D)Normal Revers

A Auto / M Manual A Manual / M Auto A Auto / M Auto A Manual / M Manual

Auto Manual

Auto Only Manual Only

A/M

A/M

2-5 3-4

Top

3-33

3.3 Switch -

[ I-Gain ] [Trk]OFF Shtl VTRA 1

FRM1A 2

V

RETR

[ ]MENU 1

Switch 1

SSaw: A/M:AM

RET:R RET Normal

Zoom

Switch 1

SSaw: A/M:AM

RET:R RET Normal

Iris

Switch

2 6

3

1 Set

SSaw

Switch

Top

Switch 1

VTR:V

A 1

AUX2:A 2

VTR

AUX1: FRM1 Shtl

6MENU Set Switch 1

(D)

(D)Zoom Iris

Zoom Iris

ZoomIris

1 2 MANUAL

AUTO / REMOTE

3 TELE OPEN WIDE CLOSE 4 3-59

2-5 3-4

Top

3-35

Frame Preset1 ................................................................................. 3-36

Frame Preset1 ON/OFF ....................................................................................... 3-37

Frame Preset1 ON/OFF "A" ........................................ 3-38

Frame Preset2 ................................................................................. 3-39

Frame Preset2 ON/OFF ....................................................................................... 3-40

Frame Preset2 ON/OFF "A" ........................................ 3-41

....................................................................................... 3-42

........................................................................................... 3-43

........................................................................................... 3-44

Top Top

Top

Top

Top

Top

Top

Top

3.4 Preset

3.4 Preset

3-36

3.4 Preset -Frame Preset1

Preset

2

3

4

5

[ I-Gain ] [Trk]OFF Shtl VTRA 1

FRM1A 2

V

RETR

[ ]MENU 1

Top

Preset

A

A

Frame1

Frame1

PRE FAST

R

1 2Set

Set

Set

Frame1

Frame1: Preset

PRE Frame2: PRE ZSpeed: 800

Frame1: Preset

FAST Frame2: PRE ZSpeed: 800

Frame1: Preset

PRE

Focus: OFF Zoom: ON

A

Frame1: Preset

FAST

Focus: OFF Zoom: ON

Frame1: Preset

PRE Frame2: PRE ZSpeed: 800

(D)

(D)PRE FAST

Set Set2 PresetMENU Set

PRE3-42

Frame Preset1

2-5 3-4

Top

3-37

3.4 Preset -Frame Preset1 ON/OFF

2

3

[ I-Gain ] [Trk]OFF Shtl VTRA 1

FRM1A 2

V

RETR

[ ]MENU 1

Frame1: PRE

Focus: OFF Zoom: ON

Preset

Frame1: PRE

Focus: OFF Zoom: OFF

Preset

1 2Set

Set

Frame1: Preset

PRE Frame2: PRE ZSpeed: 800

Frame1: Preset

FAST Frame2: PRE ZSpeed: 800

Frame1: Preset

PRE Frame2: PRE ZSpeed: 800

Preset

4

5

Top

Preset

A

A

Frame1

Frame1

ON OFF

Set

Frame1 Zoom

A

R

(D)

(D)

Set Set2 PresetMENU Set

ON OFF

Frame Preset1 ON/OFF

2-5 3-4

Top

3-38

3.4 Preset -Frame Preset1 ON/OFF A

[ I-Gain ] [Trk]OFF Shtl VTRA 1

FRM1A 2

V

RETR

[ ]MENU 1

Frame1: Preset

PRE Frame2: PRE ZSpeed: 800

Frame1: Preset

FAST Frame2: PRE ZSpeed: 800

Frame1: Preset

PRE

Focus: OFF Zoom: ON

Frame1: Preset

PRE

Focus: ON Zoom: ON

Frame1: Preset

PRE Frame2: PRE ZSpeed: 800

2

3 2

1 2Set

Set

Preset

4

5

Top

Preset

A

A

Frame1

Frame1

ON OFF

Set

Frame1 Focus

A

(D)

(D)

Set Set2 2PresetMENU Set

OFF ON

A R Focus

Frame Preset1 ON/OFF A

2-5 3-4

Top

3-39

3.4 Preset -Frame Preset2

[ ]

Preset

2 2

3

4

5

[ I-Gain ] [Trk]OFF Shtl VTRA 1

FRM1A 2

V

RETR

[ ]MENU 1

Top

Preset

A

A

Frame2

Frame2

PRE FAST

Frame1: Preset

PRE Frame2: ZSpeed: 800

PRE

Frame1: Preset

PRE Frame2: ZSpeed: 800

FAST

1 2Set

Set

Set

Frame2

Frame2: Preset

PRE

Focus: OFF Zoom: ON

A

Frame2: Preset

FAST

Focus: OFF Zoom: ON

Frame1: Preset

PRE Frame2: PRE ZSpeed: 800

R

(D)

(D)PRE FAST

Set Set2 2PresetMENU Set

PRE3-42

Frame Preset2

2-5 3-4

Top

3-40

3.4 Preset -Frame Preset2 ON/OFF

Frame Preset2 ON/OFF

2 2

3

[ I-Gain ] [Trk]OFF Shtl VTRA 1

FRM1A 2

V

RETR

[ ]MENU 1

Frame2: PRE

Focus: OFF Zoom: ON

Preset

Frame2: PRE

Focus: OFF Zoom: OFF

Preset

1 2Set

Set

Frame1: Preset

PRE Frame2: PRE ZSpeed: 800

Preset

4

5

Top

Preset

A

A

Frame2

Frame2

ON OFF

Set

Frame2 Zoom

A

Frame1: Preset

PRE Frame2: ZSpeed: 800

PRE

Frame1: Preset

PRE Frame2: ZSpeed: 800

PRE

R

(D)

(D)

Set Set2 2PresetMENU Set

ON OFF

2-5 3-4

Top

3-41

3.4 Preset -Frame Preset2 ON/OFF A

[ I-Gain ] [Trk]OFF Shtl VTRA 1

FRM1A 2

V

RETR

[ ]MENU 1

Frame2: Preset

PRE

Focus: OFF Zoom: ON

Frame2: Preset

PRE

Focus: ON Zoom: ON

Frame1: Preset

PRE Frame2: PRE ZSpeed: 800

2 2

3 2

1 2Set

Set

Preset

4

5

Top

Preset

A

A

Frame2

Frame2

ON OFF

Set

Frame2 Focus

A

Frame1: Preset

PRE Frame2: ZSpeed: 800

PRE

Frame1: Preset

PRE Frame2: ZSpeed: 800

PRE

(D)

(D)

Set Set2 2 2PresetMENU Set

OFF ON

A R Focus

Frame Preset2 ON/OFF A

2-5 3-4

Top

3-42

3.4 Preset -

2 3

3

[ I-Gain ] [Trk]OFF Shtl VTRA 1

FRM1A 2

V

RETR

[ ]MENU 1

1 2Set

Frame2: Preset

PRE ZSpeed: ZMovement

800

Frame2: Preset

PRE ZSpeed: ZMovement

500

Frame1: Preset

PRE Frame2: PRE ZSpeed: 800

Preset

Top

Preset

ZSpeed

(D)

(D)

2 3PresetMENU Set

001 800

Memo 2

Frame1,Frame2

2-5 3-4

3-43

3.4 Preset -

2 4

3

4

6

[ I-Gain ] [Trk]OFF Shtl VTRA 1

FRM1A 2

V

RETR

[ ]MENU 1

Frame2: Preset

PRE ZSpeed: ZMovement

800

Preset ZMovement

Stop: Start: 99

91

Preset ZMovement

Stop: Start: D99

91

Preset ZMovement

Stop: Start: 50

91

5

1 2Set

Set

Start

Set

Frame1: Preset

PRE Frame2: PRE ZSpeed: 800

Preset

Top

Preset

A

ZMovement

ZMovement

ZMovement

A

(D)

(D)

2 4PresetMENU Set Set Set

00 99

2-5 3-4

3-44

[ I-Gain ] [Trk]OFF Shtl VTRA 1

FRM1A 2

V

RETR

[ ]MENU 1

Frame2: Preset

PRE ZSpeed: ZMovement

800

Preset ZMovement

Stop: Start: 99

91

Frame1: Preset

PRE Frame2: PRE ZSpeed: 800

Preset ZMovement

Stop: Start: 99

D91

Preset ZMovement

Stop: Start: 99

70

2 4

3

4 2

6

5

1 2Set

Set

Stop

Set

Preset

Top

Preset

A

ZMovement

ZMovement

ZMovement

A

91

2 24PresetMENU Set Set Set

00 99

3.4 Preset -

2-5 3-4

3-45

(1) .................................................................................................... 3-46

(2) .................................................................................................... 3-47

.................................................................................................................... 3-48

ON/OFF ............................................................................................................ 3-49

ON/OFF .............................................................................................. 3-50

Top Top

Top

Top

Top

3.5 Iris

3.5 Iris

3-46

3.5 Iris -

2

(1)

Iris

Top

Iris

[I-Gain]

6

[ I-Gain ] [Trk]OFF Shtl VTRA 1

FRM1A 2

V

RETR

[ ]MENU 1

1 3

4

Set

3

Set

Set

A

[ I-Gain ] Iris

Remote: 90 Auto: 52

[ ]

[ I-Gain ] Iris

Remote: 90 Auto: 55

[ ]

5

Auto

[I-Gain]

2 I-Gain

Iris [ ] [ I-Gain ] Torque: High Comp: ON

[ I-Gain ] Iris

Remote: 90 Auto: 52

[ ]

A

[ I-Gain ] Iris

Comp: ON Torque: High

[ ]

Set Set2 3 SetMENU

01 99

Iris [ ]

--> A/M AUTO

--> AUTO

3-6

Top

3-47

3.5 Iris -

Iris

Top

Iris

[I-Gain]

6

[ I-Gain ] [Trk]OFF Shtl VTRA 1

FRM1A 2

V

RETR

[ ]MENU 1

1 3

4 2

Set

3

Set

Set

A

52

5

[ I-Gain ] Iris

Remote: 90 Auto:

[ ]

[ I-Gain ] Iris

Remote: 93 Auto: 52

[ ]

Remote

[I-Gain]

2 I-Gain

Iris [ ] [ I-Gain ] Torque: High Comp: ON

[ I-Gain ] Iris

Remote: 90 Auto: 52

[ ]

A

[ I-Gain ] Iris

Comp: ON Torque: High

[ ]

Set Set2 3 2 SetMENU

90

01 99

Iris [ ]

(2)

--> A/M AUTO

--> Remote

3-6

3-48

3.5 Iris -

Iris

Top

Iris

[ I-Gain ] [Trk]OFF A 1

A 2

V

[ ]MENU 1

Shtl VTR FRM1 RETR

1 3

3

Set

2 2

High Low

Torque

[ I-Gain ] Iris [ ]

Torque: Comp: ON

High

[ I-Gain ] Iris [ ]

Torque: Comp: ON

Low

Iris [ ] [ I-Gain ] Torque: High Comp: ON

High Low

Set 2 3 2

(D)

(D)

MENU Iris [ ]

2-5 3-4

Top

3-49

3.5 Iris - ON/OFF

ON/OFF

Iris

Top

Iris

[ -Gain ] [Trk]OFF A 1

A 2

V

[ ]MENU 1

Shtl VTR FRM1 RETR

Comp ON

1 3

3

Set

2 3 Comp

ON OFF

Iris [ ] [ I-Gain ] Torque: High Comp: ON

Iris [ ]

Comp: Close: OFF

Torque: High ON

Iris [ ]

Comp: Torque: High

OFF

ON OFF

Set 2 3 3

(D)

(D)

MENU Iris [ ]

2.0xIRIS 2F

ON 2.0x ON/OFF ON

2-5 3-4

3-50

Iris

Top

Iris

[ I-Gain ] [Trk]OFF Shtl VTRA 1

FRM1A 2

V

RETR

[ ]MENU 1

Comp ON

1 3

3

Set

2 4 Close

ON OFF

Iris [ ] [ I-Gain ] Torque: High Comp: ON

Iris [ ]

Comp: Torque: High

ON Close: OFF

Iris [ ]

Comp: Close:

Torque: High ON ON

OFF ON

Set 2 3 4

(D)

(D)

MENU Iris [ ]

ON 2.0x

ON

OFF

3.5 Iris - ON/OFF

ON/OFF

2-5 3-4

3-51

ON/OFF ........................................................................................................ 3-52

F-Hold ON/OFF ...................................................................................................................... 3-53

...................................................................................................... 3-54

...................................................................................................... 3-55

...................................................................................................... 3-56

............................................................................................................. 3-57

.................................................................................................. 3-58

....................................................................................... 3-59

....................................................................................... 3-60

............................................................................................... 3-61

/ ......................................... 3-62

.................................................................................................................... 3-63

Top Top

Top

Top

Top

3.6 Zoom

3.6 Zoom

3-52

3.6 Zoom - ON/OFF

Zoom

Top

Zoom

3

[ I-Gain ] [Trk]OFF A 1

A 2

V

[ ]MENU 1

Shtl VTR FRM1 RETR

1 4Set

2

ON OFF

Tracking

Tracking: F-Hold: OFF

OFF

Movement

Zoom [ ]

Tracking F-Hold: Movement

Zoom [ ] OFF OFF

Tracking F-Hold: Movement

Zoom [ ] ON OFF

(D)

(D) OFF ON

Set 2 4MENU Zoom [ ]

ON/OFF

2-5 3-4

Top

3-53

3.6 Zoom -F-Hold ON/OFF

Zoom

Top

Zoom

3

[ I-Gain ] [Trk]OFF A 1

A 2

V

[ ]MENU 1

Shtl VTR FRM1 RETR

1 4Set

2 2

ON OFF

F-Hold

Tracking F-Hold: Movement

Zoom [ ] OFF OFF

Tracking F-Hold: Movement

Zoom [ ] OFF ON

Tracking: F-Hold: OFF

OFF

Movement

Zoom [ ]

(D)

(D) OFF ON

F-Hold F-Hold

Set 2 4 2MENU Zoom [ ]

F-Hold / F-Hold 0

F-Hold 3-6

F-Hold OFF OFF

F-Hold ON

F-Hold ON/OFF

3-54

3.6 Zoom -

Zoom

Top

Zoom

Movement

A

3

4

6

[ I-Gain ] [Trk]OFF A 1

A 2

V

[ ]MENU 1

Shtl VTR FRM1 RETR

5

1 4Set

Set

Set

2 3

Movement

Movement

Start

A

Movement Zoom

Stop: Start:

[ ]

99 91

Movement Zoom

Stop: Start:

[ ]

97 91

Movement Zoom

Stop: Start:

[ ]

D99 91

Tracking: F-Hold: OFF

OFF

OFF

Movement

Zoom [ ]

F-Hold: Movement CurveMode

Zoom [ ]

(D)

(D) 00 99

Set SetSet2 4 3MENU Zoom [ ]

2-5 3-4

3-55

3.6 Zoom -

Top

Movement 3

4 2

6

[ I-Gain ] [Trk]OFF A 1

A 2

V

[ ]MENU 1

Shtl VTR FRM1 RETR

5

1 4Set

Set

Set

2 3 Movement

Stop

Movement Zoom

Stop: Start:

[ ]

99 91

Movement Zoom

End: Stop:

[ ]

D91 99

Movement Zoom

End: Stop:

[ ]

89 99

Tracking: F-Hold: OFF

OFF

OFF

Movement

Zoom [ ]

F-Hold: Movement CurveMode

Zoom [ ]

Zoom

A

Zoom

Movement

A

91

00 99

Set SetSet2 4 3 2MENU Zoom [ ]

2-5 3-4

3-56

3.6 Zoom -

Movement 3

4 3

6

[ I-Gain ] [Trk]OFF A 1

A 2

V

[ ]MENU 1

Shtl VTR FRM1 RETR

5

Zoom

A

Movement

A

Zoom

Top

1 4Set

Set

Set

2 3 Movement

End

Movement Zoom

Stop: Start:

[ ]

99 91

Movement Zoom

End: Stop:

[ ]

D99 99

Movement Zoom

End: Stop:

[ ]

97 99

Tracking: F-Hold: OFF

OFF

OFF

Movement

Zoom [ ]

F-Hold: Movement CurveMode

Zoom [ ]

(D)

(D) 00 99

Set SetSet2 4 3 3MENU Zoom [ ]

2-5 3-4

3-57

3.6 Zoom -

CurveMode 3

4

6

[ I-Gain ] [Trk]OFF A 1

A 2

V

R

[ ]MENU 1

CurveMode Zoom

Demand: Seesaw:

[ ]

5 5

Shtl VTR FRM1 RET

5

Zoom

A

CurveNode

A

Zoom

Top

1 4Set

Set

Set

2 4

Movement CurveMode SpeedAdj

Zoom [ ]

OFF

CurveMode

CurveMode Zoom

Demand: Seesaw:

[ ]

5

CurveMode Zoom

Demand: Seesaw:

[ ]

5

Seesaw

D5

7

Tracking: F-Hold: OFF

OFF

Movement

Zoom [ ]

D

1 2 3 4 D5 6 7 8 9

Set SetSet2 4 4MENU Zoom [ ]

(1)

(9)

MAX

2-5 3-4

Top

3-58

3.6 Zoom -

CurveMode 3

4 2

6

[ I-Gain ] [Trk]OFF A 1

A 2

V

R

[ ]MENU 1

CurveMode Zoom

Demand: Seesaw:

[ ]

5 5

Shtl VTR FRM1 RET

5

1 4Set

Set

Set

2 4

Movement CurveMode SpeedAdj

Zoom [ ]

OFF

CurveMode

CurveMode Zoom

Demand: Seesaw:

[ ]

5

CurveMode Zoom

Demand: Seesaw:

[ ]

5

Demand

D5

7

Tracking: F-Hold: OFF

OFF

Movement

Zoom [ ] Zoom

A

CurveMode

A

Zoom

Top

D

1 2 3 4 D5 6 7 8 9

Set SetSet2 4 4 2MENU Zoom [ ]

(1)

(9)

MAX

2-5 3-4

Top

3-59

3.6 Zoom -

SpeedAdj 3

4

6

[ I-Gain ] [Trk]OFF A 1

A 2

V

[ ]MENU 1

SpeedAdj Zoom

Min: Max:

[ ]

99 01

R

Shtl VTR FRM1 RET

5

1 4Set

Set

Set

2 5

*

SpeedAdj

Max

* D

CurveMode SpeedAdj Control: Sped

Zoom [ ]

SpeedAdj Zoom

Min: Max:

[ ]

D99 01

SpeedAdj Zoom

Min: Max:

[ ]

97 01

Zoom

A

SpeedAdj

A

Zoom

Top

Tracking: F-Hold: OFF

OFF

Movement

Zoom [ ]

99

Min 99

Set SetSet2 4 5MENU Zoom [ ]

Max

2-5 3-4

3-60

3.6 Zoom -

SpeedAdj 3

4 2

5 2

6

[ I-Gain ] [Trk]OFF A 1

A 2

V

R

[ ]MENU 1

SpeedAdj Zoom

Min: Max:

[ ]

99 01

Shtl VTR FRM1 RET

1 4Set

Set

Set

2 5

*

CurveMode SpeedAdj Control: Sped

Zoom [ ]

SpeedAdj Zoom

Min: Max:

[ ]

03 99

SpeedAdj Zoom

Min: Max:

[ ]

99 D01

SpeedAdj

Min

* D

Zoom

A

SpeedAdj

A

Zoom

Top

Tracking: F-Hold: OFF

OFF

Movement

Zoom [ ]

01

01 Max

Set SetSet2 4 5 2MENU Zoom [ ]

Min

2-5 3-4

3-61

3.6 Zoom -

3

[ I-Gain ] [Trk]OFF A 1

A 2

V

R

[ ]MENU 1

Shtl VTR FRM1 RET

Zoom

Zoom

Top

1 4Set

2 6

SpeedAdj Control: VR-Dem: ON

Zoom [ ]

Sped

SpeedAdj Control: VR-Dem: ON

Zoom [ ]

Posi

Control

Sped Posi

Tracking: F-Hold: OFF

OFF

Movement

Zoom [ ]

(D)

(D)Sped Posi

Set 2 4 6MENU Zoom [ ]

Posi Posi 1

Sped

2-5 3-4

3-62

3.6 Zoom - /

3

[ I-Gain ] [Trk]OFF A 1

A 2

V

R

[ ]MENU 1

Shtl VTR FRM1 RET

Zoom

Zoom

Top

1 4Set

2 7 VR-Dem

ON OFF

Tracking: F-Hold: OFF

OFF

Movement

Zoom [ ]

Control: VR-Dem: DType: 300M

Zoom [ ]

ON Sped

Control: VR-Dem: DType: 300M

Zoom [ ]

OFF Sped

(D)

(D) ON OFF

Set 2 4 7MENU Zoom [ ]

/

2-5 3-4

3-63

3.6 Zoom -

3

[ I-Gain ] [Trk]OFF A 1

A 2

V

R

[ ]MENU 1

Shtl VTR FRM1 RET

Zoom

Zoom

Top

1 4Set

2 8 DType

Tracking: F-Hold: OFF

OFF

Movement

Zoom [ ]

Control: VR-Dem: DType:

Zoom [ ]

ON Sped

300M

Control: VR-Dem: DType:

Zoom [ ]

ON Sped

300A

(D)

(D)300M 300A

ZSD-300M ZSD-300A

Set 2 5 8MENU Zoom [ ]

VTR 2 300M

ZSD-300AZGA-200A300A

2-5 3-4

3-65

A .................................................................. 3-66

3.7 Focus

3.7 Focus

3-66

5

1 9

Set Set Set2MENU Focus [ ]

[ I-Gain ] [Trk]OFF A 1

A 2

V

R

[ ]MENU 1

Focus [ ] CurveMode

CurveMode 3

4

6

Set

Set

ADemand

ADemand: 5

Focus [ ] CurveMode

CurveMode ADemand: D5

Focus [ ]

CurveMode ADemand: 7

Focus [ ]

5

Shtl VTR FRM1 RET

Focus

A

CurveMode

A

Focus

Top

1 2Set

2 CurveMode

CurveMode Focus [ ]

Stan da

rd

1

9

SW SW FAR

3.7 Focus - A

A

2-5 3-4

3-67

3.8 Info

........................................................................................................................... 3-68

...................................................................................................................................... 3-69

/ ................................................................................................... 3-71

........................................................................................................................ 3-72

3.8 Info

3-68

3.8 Info -

Zoom Focus

3

Info

Top

Info

[ I-Gain ] [Trk]OFF A 1

A 2

V

R

[ ]MENU 1

Shtl VTR FRM1 RET

2 Encoder

ON OFF

1 2Set

Encoder: OFF Initialize

Info

Encoder: INDOFF

INDON

Initialize

Info

Encoder: Initialize CamSeri:

Info

CamSeri:

CamSeri: ON

ON

ON

(D)

(D)

2Set

OFF ON

MENU Info 1

3-69

3.8 Info -

ON OFF ( ) ON Manual OFF

/

ON

ON OFF

OFF

ZOOM

/

ON

ON OFF

OFF

FOCUS

1 Fol 2

3 ON

4FOCUS

5 6OFF

7

Initialize

Error!

/

3-70

3.8 Info -

4 Zoom

2 Focus

5

6

Info

Top

Info

[ I-Gain ] [Trk]OFF A 1

A 2

V

R

[ ]MENU 1

Shtl VTR FRM1 RET

2 2 Initialize

Zoom Focus

ON OFF

1 2Set

3 Set

Encoder: OFF

OFF Initialize

Info

Encoder: Info

Initialize Info

OFF OFF

Zoom: Focus:

Initialize Info

OFF Zoom: Focus:

OFF

Initialize Info

OFF Zoom: Focus:

ON

Initialize CamSeri: ON

CamSeri: ON

2 2

POWER OFF POWER ON

Set SetMENU Info

3-71

3.8 Info - /

2

User

Top

Info

[ I-Gain ] [Trk]OFF A 1

A 2

V

R

[ ]MENU 1

Shtl VTR FRM1 RET

2 6

1 Set

Info

3 3 CamSeri

4 ON OFF

Info

OFF

User

No. : User

1 Name: ResetAll

1

Encoder: OFF

ON

Info

Initialize CamSeri:

Info

CamSeri: Initialize

ON

CamSeri: Initialize

Adjust

Adjust

(D)

(D) ON OFF

3Set 6MENU Info

/

3-72

3.8 Info -

IrisZoomFocus

3

4

5 Iris

2 Zoom

3 Focus

Info

Top

Info

[ I-Gain ] [Trk]OFF A 1

A 2

V

R

[ ]MENU 1

Shtl VTR FRM1 RET

2 4 Adjust

1 2

Set

Set

Camera Fol

Set

EnterPassword

Set

Encoder: OFF Initialize

Info

Initialize Info

Adjust Camera Fol

CamSeri:

Adjust

Iris: Zoom: Focus:

Camera Fol

EnterPassword

ON

CamSeri: ON

3-73

3.8 Info -

7

6

8

9 DISPLAY

Set

Set

F2.8: F16:

Camera Fol

37150 26910

F2.8: F16:

Camera Fol

26910

F2.8: F16:

Camera Fol

26910

37150

37190

1 2 3 OFF 4 9 OFF 5

00000 65530

Set

MENU

Set Set

DISPLAY

Set

Set

42

N

Info Adjust

Camera Fol

Camera Fol

Iris

Zoom

Focus

F2. 8 F16

: 00000 (37150) 65530 : 00000 (26910) 65530

Wide Tele

: 00000 (05000) 65530 : 00000 (52000) 65530

Near Far

: 00000 (05000) 65530 : 00000 (52000) 65530

3-75

3.9 Fol.

Iris, Zoom, Focus .......................................................................................... 3-76

3.9 Fol.

3-76

Fol. 1SetMENU

Fol.

[ I-Gain ] [Trk]OFF A 1

A 2

V

R

[ ]MENU 1

Fol. Iris: Zoom: Focus:

0940 0527

0011

1

Shtl VTR FRM1 RET

1 SetFol.

Top

Iris, Zoom, Focus 0 1000

Fol. 2

3.9 Fol. - Iris, Zoom, Focus

Iris, Zoom, Focus

4-1

4

4-2

Top

MENU

[ ]

[ Trk ]

A 1

V

A 2

R

[ Frm1 ]

[ Frm2 ]

AM

[ I-Tq ]

1

3

4

VTR

Shtl

OFF

1

RET

FRM1

Norm

Zoom

H

Shtl / NON / VTR / RET / FRM1 / FRM2 / Sped

1 / 2 / 3 / 4 / 5 / 6 / 7 / 8 / 9 / A / 0

2-25

2-19~2-21

2-22~2-24

2-28

2-29

2-4

1-3

2-14

2-15

2-16

2-17

2-18

[ Z.M. ]

2 2-26,2-27

OFF / ON

VTR / RET / FRM1 / FRM2 / Sped / Shtl

FRM1 / FRM2 / Sped / Shtl / NON / VTR / RET

RET / FRM1 / FRM2 / Sped / Shtl / VTR

Norm / Reve / Auto / Manu

Zoom / Iris

H / L

3-26Display SW Set 2User 0

[ I-Gain ]

5 2-12,2-13

4-3

MENU

Zoom Focus

Iris Zoom Focus

User

Go Top

No. 1 / 2 / 3 / 4 / 5 / 6 / 7 / 8 / 9 / A / 0

1 / 2 / 3 / 4 / 5 / 6 / 7 / 8 / 9

y/n y/n

y/n y/n

/ / A Z / a z / 0 9 Name Reset

User AllUser

AllCopy

Zoom Focus

Zoom Focus

Start Stop

To No

Copy

Copy

AUX1 AUX2

Frame1

Frame2

ZSpeed ZMovement

VTR RET A/M SSaw

Switch

Preset

Auto Remote

[I-Gain]

Torque Comp Close

Iris

Seesaw Demand

Start Stop

Max Min

Tracking F-Hold

CurveMode

Movement

SpeedAdj

Control VR-Dem DType

Zoom

Focus CurveMode ADemand

#1

#2

#3

6

3

4

5

2

1

6

Iris Zoom Focus

Fol.

Shtl / NON / VTR / RET / FRM1 / FRM2 / Sped

VTR / RET / FRM1 / FRM2 / Sped / Shtl FRM1 / FRM2 / Sped / Shtl / NON / VTR / RET

RET / FRM1 / FRM2 / Sped / Shtl / VTR Nomal / Revers / Auto / Manual Zoom / Iris

Shtl

VTR FRM1

Unlock Unlock/Lock

1

n y

y/ny

n n

1

RET Nomal Zoom

PRE / FASTPRE

001 ~ 800800

PRE / FASTPRE

ON / OFF

ON / OFF

OFF / ON

OFF / ON

00 ~ 99 00 ~ 99

ON

ON

OFF

OFF

High / Low ON / OFF

High

ON OFF / ONOFF

OFF / ONOFF OFF / ONOFF

Sped / PosiSped ON / OFFON

OFF / ONOFF

OFF / ONOFF OFF / ONOFF

< >

< >

< >

300M / 300A 300M

(0000 ~ 1000)(**) (0000 ~ 1000)(**) (0000 ~ 1000)

00000 ~ 65530 00000 ~ 65530 00000 ~ 65530

(**)

1 ~ 9 1 ~ 9

5 5

00 ~ 99 00 ~ 99

99 91

End 00 ~ 9999

Min 99 01 ~ Max

99

1 ~ 95

01

99 91

01 ~ 99 01 ~ 9990

1

6

1

[ ]

Encoder Initialize

Adjust

Info

UserCopy To Other Lens Access

( )

#1~3 R

< >

Set

3-4 3-5

3-2

3-6 3-7

3-8

3-9 3-10,3-11 3-12,3-13

3-15~3-18 3-28 3-29 3-30 3-31 3-32 3-33

3-36 3-37 3-38 3-39 3-40 3-41

3-42

3-43 3-44

3-46 3-47

3-48 3-49 3-50

3-52 3-53

3-54 3-55 3-56

3-57 3-58

3-59 3-60 3-61 3-62 3-63

3-66

3-68

3-70 3-70

3-76 3-76 3-76

3-72 3-72 3-72

CamSeri ON/OFF ON 3-71

FO R

E W

O R

D

ENGLISH VERSION

SC RE

EN CO

NF IG

ER AT

IO N

LI ST

O F

SE TT

IN G

TO P

S C

R E

E N

M E

N U

S C

R E

E N

FCC REGULATIONS

This device complies with Part 15 of the FCC Rules. Operation is subject to the following two conditions: (1) This device may not cause harmful interference, and (2) this device must accept any interference received, including interference that may cause undesired operation.

Note: This equipment has been tested and found to comply with the limits for a Class B digital device, pursuant to Part 15 of the FCC Rules. These limits are designed to provide reasonable protection against harmful interference in a residential installation. This equipment generates, uses and can radiate radio frequency energy and, if not installed and used in accordance with the instructions, may cause harmful interference to radio communications. However, there is no guarantee that interference will not occur in a particular installation. If this equipment does cause harmful interference to radio or television reception, which can be determined by turning the equipment off and on, the user is encouraged to try to correct the interference by one or more of the following measures: -- Reorient or relocate the receiving antenna. -- Increase the separation between the equipment and receiver. -- Connect the equipment into an outlet on a circuit different from that to which the receiver is connected. -- Consult the dealer or an experienced radio/TV technician for help.

Do not make any changes or modifications to the equipment unless otherwise specified in the manual. If such changes or modifications should be made, you could be required to stop operation of the equipment.

Canadian Radio Interference Regulations

CAN ICES-3(B)/NMB-3(B)

We, Canon Inc., in Japan and CANON EUROPE LTD., in U.K., confirm that the BCTV zoom lens is conformity with the essential requirements of EC Directive(s) by applying the following standards: EN55103-1 and EN55103-2

Note: a) Applicable Electromagnetic Environments: E1 (residential), E2 (commercial and light industrial), E3 (urban outdoors) and E4 (controlled EMC

environment, ex. TV studio). b) Use of shielded cable is required to comply with limits specified by above standards.

Only for European Union and EEA (Norway, Iceland, and Liechtenstein)

This symbol indicates that this product is not to be disposed of with your household waste, according to the WEEE Directive (2012/19/EU) and national legislation. This product should be handed over to a designated collection point, e.g., on an authorized one-for-one basis when you buy a new similar product or to an authorized collection site for recycling waste electrical and electronic equipment (EEE). Improper handling of this type of waste could have a possible negative impact on the environment and human health due to potentially hazardous substances that are generally associated with EEE. At the same time, your cooperation in the correct disposal of this product will contribute to the effective usage of natural resources. For more information

about where you can drop off your waste equipment for recycling, please contact your local city office, waste authority, approved WEEE scheme or your household waste disposal service. For more information regarding return and recycling of WEEE products, please visit www.canon-europe.com/weee.

Dieses Produkt ist zum Gebrauch im Wohnbereich, Geschafts- und Gewerbebereich sowie in Kleinbetrieben vorgesehen.

..

E1

Thank you for purchasing the Canon BCTV zoom lens.

This lens comes with operation manuals: Lens Manual and Information Display CD-ROM, and Poket Guide. Information Display Manual contains the operation method and operation procedure of the information display. Please refer to the Information Display Manual when it is needed.

FOREWORD

FO R

E W

O R

D

E2

FOREWORD CONTENTS........................................................................................................................................ E2

GENERAL.SAFETY.INFORMATION................................................................................................. E5

How.This.Operation.Manual.Is.Laid.Out......................................................................................... E9

Getting.to.Know.the.Names.of.the.Parts.......................................................................................E11

Basic.Operating.Procedure............................................................................................................ E12

1...Screen.Configuration 1.1 Screen Configuration................................................................................................................. E1-2

Top screen ................................................................................................................................................... E1-2 MENU screen .............................................................................................................................................. E1-3

2..Top.Screen 2.1 Top Screen ................................................................................................................................ E2-2

2.2 Users ......................................................................................................................................... E2-4 User selection (User 0 to 9) ......................................................................................................................... E2-5

Analog mode settings (User A) ............................................................................................................... E2-6 Analog mode operations (User A) ........................................................................................................... E2-9

2.3 Iris gain setting ........................................................................................................................ E2-12 (1) Auto iris gain setting ..................................................................................................................... E2-12 (2) Remote iris gain setting ................................................................................................................ E2-13

2.4 Zoom track function ON/OFF selection ................................................................................... E2-14

2.5 Function allocation to AUX1 switch ......................................................................................... E2-15

2.6 Function allocation to VTR switch ........................................................................................... E2-16

2.7 Function allocation to AUX2 switch ......................................................................................... E2-17

2.8 Function allocation to RET switch ........................................................................................... E2-18 2.9 Frame Preset1 settings ........................................................................................................... E2-19

(1) Frame Preset1 preset speed setting ............................................................................................ E2-19 (2) Frame Preset1 zoom ON/OFF selection ...................................................................................... E2-20 (3) Frame Preset1 focus ON/OFF selection ("A" type lens only) ....................................................... E2-21

2.10 Frame Preset2 settings ......................................................................................................... E2-22 (1) Frame Preset2 preset speed setting ............................................................................................ E2-22 (2) Frame Preset2 zoom ON/OFF selection ...................................................................................... E2-23 (3) Frame Preset2 focus ON/OFF selection ("A" type lens only) ....................................................... E2-24

2.11 Iris torque setting ................................................................................................................... E2-25

2.12 Zoom curve mode setting ...................................................................................................... E2-26 (1) Seesaw switch curve characteristics setting ................................................................................ E2-26 (2) Analog demand curve characteristics setting ............................................................................... E2-27

2.13 Iris A/M switch setting ............................................................................................................ E2-28

2.14 Function allocation to seesaw switch .................................................................................... E2-29

CONTENTS

CONTENTS

E3

3..MENU.Screen 3.1 MENU Screen ........................................................................................................................... E3-2

3.2 User Screen .............................................................................................................................. E3-3 User selection (User 0 to 9) ......................................................................................................................... E3-4 Giving names to the users ........................................................................................................................... E3-5 Resetting ..................................................................................................................................................... E3-6

(1) Resetting the settings for one user .................................................................................................... E3-6 (2) Resetting the settings for all the users .............................................................................................. E3-7

Copying the settings established for one user to another user ................................................................... E3-8 Copying data between lenses ................................................................................................................... E3-10

(1) Copying the data settings established for one user into another lens ............................................. E3-10 (2) Copying the data settings established for all the users into another lens ........................................ E3-12 (3) When an error display has appeared .............................................................................................. E3-14

Lock mode settings (User 0 to 9)............................................................................................................... E3-15 Analog mode settings (User A) .................................................................................................................. E3-19 Analog mode operations (User A) ............................................................................................................. E3-23 Escape operation....................................................................................................................................... E3-26

3.3 Switch Screen ......................................................................................................................... E3-27 Allocating a function to the AUX1 switch ................................................................................................... E3-28 Allocating a function to the AUX2 switch ................................................................................................... E3-29 Allocating a function to the VTR switch ..................................................................................................... E3-30 Allocating a function to the RET switch ..................................................................................................... E3-31 Setting the iris A/M switch.......................................................................................................................... E3-32 Allocating a function to the seesaw switch ................................................................................................ E3-33

3.4 Preset Screen.......................................................................................................................... E3-35 Setting the Frame Preset1 preset speed ................................................................................................... E3-36 Setting the Frame Preset1 zoom to ON or OFF ........................................................................................ E3-37 Setting the Frame Preset1 focus to ON or OFF ("A" type lens only) ......................................................... E3-38 Setting the Frame Preset2 preset speed ................................................................................................... E3-39 Setting the Frame Preset2 zoom to ON or OFF ........................................................................................ E3-40 Setting the Frame Preset2 focus to ON or OFF ("A" type lens only) ......................................................... E3-41 Setting the zoom speed in the preset mode .............................................................................................. E3-42 Setting the zoom start characteristics for preset operations...................................................................... E3-43 Setting the zoom stop characteristics for preset operations ...................................................................... E3-44

3.5 Iris Screen ............................................................................................................................... E3-45 Iris gain setting .......................................................................................................................................... E3-46

(1) Auto iris gain setting ........................................................................................................................ E3-46 (2) Remote iris gain setting ................................................................................................................... E3-47

Setting the iris torque................................................................................................................................. E3-48 Setting the iris correction to ON or OFF .................................................................................................... E3-49 Setting the iris close detection to ON or OFF ............................................................................................ E3-50

3.6 Zoom Screen ........................................................................................................................... E3-51 Setting the zoom track to ON or OFF ........................................................................................................ E3-52 Setting F-Hold to ON or OFF ..................................................................................................................... E3-53 Setting the zoom servo start characteristics .............................................................................................. E3-54 Setting the zoom servo stop characteristics .............................................................................................. E3-55 Setting the zoom mechanism end stop characteristics ............................................................................. E3-56 Setting the curve characteristics of the seesaw switch ............................................................................. E3-57 Setting the analog demand curve characteristics ...................................................................................... E3-58

CONTENTS

FO R

E W

O R

D

E4

CONTENTS

Setting the maximum value of the zoom speed control ............................................................................. E3-59 Setting the minimum value of the zoom speed control .............................................................................. E3-60 Setting the servo type from the zoom demand .......................................................................................... E3-61 Setting the zoom speed control to ON or OFF for the zoom demand ....................................................... E3-62 Setting the zoom demand specifications ................................................................................................... E3-63

3.7 Focus Screen .......................................................................................................................... E3-65 Focus demand curve characteristics (A type lenses only) ...................................................................... E3-66

3.8 Info Screen .............................................................................................................................. E3-67 Encoder output setting............................................................................................................................... E3-68 Initialize operation setting .......................................................................................................................... E3-69 Setting the camera serial communication to ON or OFF ........................................................................... E3-71 Adjustment of Camera Fol Voltage ............................................................................................................ E3-72

3.9 Fol. Screen .............................................................................................................................. E3-75 Lens follow-up displays (iris, zoom and focus) .......................................................................................... E3-76

4..List.of.Setting

Index...........................................................................................................................End

E5

GENERAL SAFETY INFORMATION

FO R

E W

O R

D

GENERAL SAFETY INFORMATION

The safety warnings and cautions provided on the product or its operation manual must be observed. Failure to observe these warnings and cautions provided to guard against hazards may result in injury or accident. Read this operation manual carefully to familiarize yourself with its contents and ensure that you can operate the product properly. Also, store this manual in a safe place where it can be easily reached whenever re- quired.

This operation manual uses the following symbols and terms to iden- tify hazards to protect you and others by aiming to prevent the occurrence of accidents.

WARNING This indicates a potentially hazardous situation which, if not heeded, may result in death or serious injury to you or others. Be sure to heed all warning notices to ensure safe operation at all times.

CAUTION Indicates hazardous situations which, if not heeded, may result in minor or moderate injury to you or other persons, or damages to your property.

(NOTE) Emphasizes essential information which, if not heeded, may render the product unworkable or cause it to function improperly. Also, provides helpful information for operation.

E6

GENERAL SAFETY INFORMATION

HANDLING THE PRODUCT

WARNING 1. Never allow water to enter or be spilled on the product. Immediately stop using the product if water

enters the product. Otherwise, a fire or electric shock hazard may result.

2. Do not stare at the sun or other source of high-intensity light through the lens. Doing so may result in injury to your eyes.

CAUTION 1. Do not drop the lens when transporting it or when attaching or detaching it to or from the camera head.

The lens may fall, possibly causing injury.

2. Make sure all mountings are tightened securely. If any of these mountings becomes loose, the lens may fall, possibly causing injury.

3. Always grasp the connector itself when connecting or disconnecting the lens cable. Pulling on the cable portion may result in damage to the cable, such as breakage of the conductors. Power leaking from a damaged cable may present a fire or electric shock hazard.

4. Inspect all mountings periodically (about every 6 months to 1 year) to make sure they are securely tightened, and tighten any loose portions. Otherwise, the lens may fall, possibly causing injury.

5. If it becomes necessary to repair this product, or to perform any operations or adjustments not men- tioned in this operation manual, contact Canons representative or the dealer who originally supplied the lens.

(NOTE) 1. Protect the lens from strong impacts of shocks. Striking or dropping the lens may result in a malfunc-

tion.

2. This lens is not completely waterproof, so avoid exposing it directly to rain or snow. When the lens must be used in rain or snow, provisions should be made to prevent the lens from get- ting wet.

3. Under dusty conditions, the lens should be mounted or dismounted with a cover placed over the mount so as to prevent dust from entering into the interior.

4. Do not bring the lens, kept in a very cold ambient temperature, into a warm room, because the lens may fog on the inside or condensation may occur. In these cases, the lens cannot be used until these problems clear. If the lens must be used under such conditions, countermeasures are recommended. (For instance, before bringing the lens into a warm room, put it in a vinyl bag with an effective desic- cant, and then bring it into the room. After the temperature acclimatizes to the same level as the room temperature, take out the lens out of the vinyl bag.)

5. If the lens is to be used in adverse environments, such as in a chemical laden atmosphere, consult with Canons representative beforehand.

E7

GENERAL SAFETY INFORMATION

FO R

E W

O R

D

WARNING 1. Should any of the abnormalities described below occur, immediately unplug the lens cable from the

camera, and then contact Canons representative or the dealer from whom you purchased the lens. Smoke, abnormal smell, or abnormal noise. Entry of foreign objects (including metals and liquids) inside the products.

WARNING 1. Unplug the lens cable and remove the lens from the camera, before attempting to clean the lens.

Never use flammable substances such as benzene or thinner for cleaning, as this may present a seri- ous fire or electric shock hazard.

(NOTE) 1. Dust or fingerprints on the lens surface.

Gently blow or brush away dust or dirt on the lens surface using a lens blower or a soft lens brush. Re- move any fingerprints or other stains with a clean cotton cloth moistened with commercially available lens cleaning fluid or lens cleaning paper. Gently swirl the cloth or cleaning paper over the lens surface, starting at the center area of the lens, and then circling gradually outward until whole lens surface has been covered. Be careful not to rub dust across the lens, as the lens surface may be scratched.

2. Periodic inspection A periodic inspection about once a year is recommended. The inspection and maintenance interval depends on the operating conditions, the frequency of use, and the environment. If required, overhaul the lens.

CAUTION 1. Always attach the lens cap (or hood cap) and the dust cap before storing the lens.

Storing the lens without these caps attached may present a fire hazard. (Very bright light, such as sun- light, may be focused by the lens and cause a fire.)

(NOTE) 1. Moisture inside the lens

If the lens becomes damp because of use in fog, mist or drizzle, wipe off the moisture with a soft dry cloth and seal the lens together with an efficient desiccant in a vinyl bag to remove moisture which has entered into the interior.

DEALING WITH ABNORMALITIES

MAINTENANCE AND INSPECTION

STORAGE

E8

TO THE CUSTOMER

TO THE CUSTOMER

1. Canon shall bear no responsibility for damage resulting from improper operation of this product by the customer.

2. Canon shall make no guarantees about the product quality, functions, or operation manual and its marketability and suitability for the customer's purpose. Moreover, Canon shall bear no responsibility for any damage, direct or incidental, that results from us- age for the customer's purpose.

3. Canon shall make no guarantees about the results obtained using this product.

4. The product specifications, configuration, and appearance are subject to change without prior notice.

5. For further information on repairs, maintenance, or adjustments not mentioned in this operation manual, contact your Canon dealer or your Canon sales representative.

6. Note that Canon may be unable to undertake servicing or repair of a product if it is modified without consulting Canon or your Canon sales representative.

CANON INC. 30-2, Shimomaruko 3-chome, Ohta-ku, Tokyo 146-8501, Japan

Canon Europe Ltd. 3 The Square, Stockley Park, Uxbridge, Middlesex,UB11 1ET UK

All rights reserved. No part of this operation manual may be reproduced or copied in any form or by any means without the written permission of Canon Inc.

E9

How this operation manual is laid out

How This Operation Manual Is Laid Out

2.9 Frame Preset1 settings

(1) Frame Preset1 preset speed setting

This item does not appear with the "R" type lens.

1 Move the key four times.

2 Push the key.

3 Move the key or key.

4 Push the key.

The item is now highlighted.

*

*

Top

A

[ I-Gain ] [Trk]OFF Shtl VTRA 1

FRM1A 2

V

RETR

[ ]MENU 1

Move the left or right key to select {PRE} or {FAST}.

Set

Set

1

[ I-Tq ] H [ Z.M. ] [ Frm1 ] [ Frm2 ]

FRM1A 2 RETR

[ ]MENU

Frame1: Preset

PRE

Focus: OFF Zoom: ON

Frame1: Preset

FAST

Focus: OFF Zoom: ON

(D) Default value

(D)

Setor

PRESelection item

Function

FAST

Operation at the preset speed

Operation at the maximum speed

MENU Set4 [ Frm1 ]

2.9 Frame Preset1 settings - Frame Preset1 preset speed setting

E 2-19

List of functions or items which can be selected

Operation procedure

Checkpoint

Outline of function and checkpoints

Quick reference for operation procedure

Page number

Function title

Function title and outline of functions

This makes it possible to select whether to use the preset speed or maximum speed to move to the memory position. (Bear in mind that the display is switched to another screen when this speed is set.)

Prior to operation, select the user for whom the settings will be made. (For details on how to select the user, refer to page E2-5 or E3-4.)

Note: If {PRE} is selected, set the speed. (See page E3-42)

[ Frm1 ]

Section title

IMPORTANT

TO PS

C R

EE N

The display is switched to the Preset screen, and an underline appears below [Frame1]. The last setting or default value is highlighted.

The display returns to Screen A.

Setting Operation Procedure Page

FO R

E W

O R

D

E10

How this operation manual is laid out

Stylistic feature Explanation

{ }

[ ]

screen* *

R Type

A Type

Example

The A type lens only.

With the R type lens.

An underline appears at [Frame1].

Select {FAST}.

The Top screen appears.

IASE lens indicated as A type.

IRSE lens indicated as R type.

The name of the screen is indicated by underlining.

The name of a setting item is indicated within the [ ] square brackets.

The name of an item or function to be selected is indicated by the { } set of parentheses.

Type

Manual

Zoom

Focus

Operation modeOperation

Servo / Manual

Manual (with built-in motor for servo)

Zoom

Focus

Servo / Manual

A Type

R Type

Refer to the table below for the product models that correspond to the major lens types featured in the text.

Classification of major lens types featured in the text

E11

Getting to know the names of the parts

Getting to Know the Names of the Parts

DISPLAY

DISPLAY switch Push this to show the display. When it is pushed once, the display is turned on; when it is pushed again, the display is turned off.

Display This appears when the DISPLAY switch is pushed. If two or more minutes are allowed to elapse without any operation being performed, the display turns off automatically.

Digital function selector This key is used to perform all the setting operations on the display. Depending on the operation method, one of its five functions may be set. (Refer to Control key names and operation methods in the table below.)

OperationName Detailed description How the key's operation is represented

PUSH

This key is pushed when { } has appeared on the screen

display or when a selection is to be entered. keySet

key

Set key

Right key

Left key

Up key

Down key

key

Push

Move right

Move left

key

key

Move up

Move down

The operation of this key takes effect when { } has appeared

on the screen display.

The operation of this key takes effect when { } has appeared

on the screen display.

The operation of this key takes effect when { } has appeared

on the screen display.

The operation of this key takes effect when { } has appeared

on the screen display.

Names of the parts

Control key names and operation methods

FO R

E W

O R

D

Basic Operating Procedure

Basic operating procedure

Note: For details on how to turn on the power of the lens, refer to the cameras Operation Manual.

[ I-Gain ] [Trk]OFF Shtl VTRA 1

FRM1A 2

V

RETR

[ ]MENU 1

DISPLAY

DISPLAY

DISPLAY

Push the DISPLAY switch.

The display lights up.

The display is turned off.

The changes made are stored in the memory.

Turn on the power of the lens.

Push the DISPLAY switch.

Use the control key to perform the settings.

1

2

3

4

[ I-Gain ] [Trk]OFF Shtl VTRA 1

FRM1A 2

V

RETR

[ ]MENU 1

Details of how to set the setting items are given on page E2-2 and following.

Checkpoint: If the control key is not operated for 2 or more minutes, the display turns off automatically. (Auto OFF) However, while the Fol. screen is shown, the display will not turn off automatically no matter how many minutes elapse. It is turned off only by pushing the DISPLAY switch.

Checkpoint: Even when the display is turned off by AUTO OFF, the changes made to the settings are stored in the memory just as when the display is turned off by pushing the DISPLAY switch.

Note: The changes made to the setting will be stored in the memory and turned off by pushing the DISPLAY switch while the display is shown .

Note: In the case of the power of the lens turned off while the display is shown, the changes made to the setting may not be stored in the memory.

E12

To restore the original settings The initial factory settings can be restored at times when, for instance, settings have been performed incorrectly or as a trial. For details, see Resetting on page E3-6.

IMPORTANT

ResetAll User

User: AllUser:

1

y/n y/n

Reference: Display that appears when the settings are to be reset

E1-1

1Screen Configuration

E1-2

1.1 Screen Configuration

1.1 Screen Configuration

Top screen

The first screen to appear when the DISPLAY switch is pushed is referred to as the Top initial screen (see Fig. 1-1 on the left).

The 8 most frequently used items among the 14 setting items are displayed on this screen. To display the other 6 setting items, push the down key to scroll down the screen. (See Fig. 1-2 on the left).

1. To MENU screen

2. User selection

3. Iris gain settings

4. Zoom track function ON/OFF selection

5. Function allocation to AUX1 switch

6. Function allocation to VTR switch

7. Function allocation to AUX2 switch

8. Function allocation to RET switch

9. Frame Preset1 settings

10. Frame Preset2 settings

11. Iris torque setting

12. Zoom curve mode setting

13. Iris A/M switch setting

14. Function allocation to seesaw switch

[ I-Gain ] [Trk]OFF

Shtl VTRA 1

FRM1A 2

V

RETR

[ ]MENU 1

Fig1-1

Top initial screen

(For the setting procedures, see 2. Top screen.)

Fig1-2

[ Frm1 ] [ Frm2 ]

[ ]MENU 1

NormAM Zoom

[ Z.M. ][ I-Tq ] H

Items which are displayed by scrolling

Item which is not scrolled

The 33 setting items and 3 follow-up relative value displays appear on the display screen of this product. The most frequently used items are displayed in a simplified format on the Top screen (screen which appears when the DISPLAY switch is pushed). The setting of all the items and the detailed settings can be performed on the MENU screen (see next page).

A total of 14 setting items (see below) are provided on the Top screen.

E1-3

1.1 Screen Configuration

MENU screen

(For the setting procedures, see 3. MENU screen.)

1. User screen ....... (See Fig. 1-3 below) 2. Switch screen ........ (See Fig. 1-4 below) 3. Preset screen ........ (See Fig. 1-5 below) 4. Iris screen ....... (See Fig. 1-6 below) 5. Zoom screen ......... (See Fig. 1-7 below) 6. Focus screen *2 .......... (See Fig. 1-8 below) 7. Info screen ....... (See Fig. 1-9 below) 8. Fol. screen ....... (See Fig. 1-10 below)

The icon of the screen which has been

selected is highlighted.

The icons of the screens which have not

been selected are not highlighted.No. :

User

1

Name:

ResetAll

1

User screen

Fig1-3

No. :

User

1

Name:

ResetAll

1

Switch

Fig1-4

Switch 1

VTR:V

A 1

AUX2:A 2

VTR

AUX1: FRM1 Shtl

Preset screen

Fig1-5

Frame1:

Preset

PRE

Frame2: PRE

ZSpeed: 800

Iris

Fig1-6

Iris [ ] [ I-Gain ] Torque: High Comp: ON

Zoom screen

Fig1-7

Tracking:

F-Hold: OFF

OFF

Movement

Zoom [ ]

Focus screen

Fig1-8

CurveMode

Focus [ ]

Fol. screen

Fig1-10

Fol. Iris: Zoom: Focus:

0940 0527

0011

1

Info screen

Fig1-9

Info

Initialize CamSeri: ON

Encoder: OFF

MENU Screen

The 33 setting items and 3 follow-up relative value displays are organized by function on the following 8 screens (or 7 screens in the case of the R type lens). These screens are collectively known as the MENU screen*1.

*1:There is no screen which is actually called the MENU screen, but the 8 screens listed above are collectively referred to as the MENU screen.

*2: This item does not appear with the R type lens.

To display these screens, select [MENU] on the Top screen, and push the Set key. The User screen is the first to appear. If the left or right key is now pushed, the screen is replaced by another screen.

[ ]

1

SC RE

EN CO

NF IG

ER AT

IO N

E2-1

2 Top Screen

E2-2

2.1 Top Screen

2.1 Top Screen

The screen which appears when the DISPLAY switch is pushed is referred to as the Top screen. A total of 14 items can be set on the Top screen. The rst screen to appear is referred to as the Top initial screen, and 8 items are displayed on it. When the down key is pushed, the display is scrolled down each time so that the other 6 items appear one after the other. (See gure below) Depending on the item concerned, its setting status can be checked. (See *1 in the gure below)

[ I-Gain ] [Trk]OFF

Shtl VTRA 1

FRM1A 2

V

RETR

[ ]MENU 1

[ I-Tq ] H [ Z.M. ]

[ Frm2 ][ Frm1 ]

ZoomNormAM

Top initial screen

Items which are displayed by scrolling

9 10

11 12

13 14

A 1

Inside the bold-line boxes: The current setting statuses are displayed for the items in these boxes. Example: Shtl indicates that the shuttle function

has been set in the AUX1 switch.

*1

1

3

5

7

4

6

8

2

5 Numbers in white on a black ground: These correspond to the numbers of the switches on the drive unit to which functions have been allocated. Refer to the lens illustration below.

ft

m

1x

2x

A 1

A 2

V

R

AM

14

13

8

5

6

7

E2-3

2.1 Top Screen

User

Zoom track

VTR switch

Frame Preset2

Iris gain

Seesaw switch

AUX1 switch

AUX2 switch

Iris A/M switch

Iris torque

Frame Preset1

Users User selection (User 0 to 9) Analog mode settings (User A) Analog mode operations (User A)

The settings can be changed for each of 10 users, who are indicated by the numbers 0 to 9, so that the appropriate settings will be used by the appropriate user. The user who will use them or the user for whom the settings are changed is selected here.When A is selected, the analog mode of a conventional type of drive unit can be established.When the analog mode is established, the digital functions can no longer be used.

This is set to ON when the zoom track function is to be used.

At the factory, the {shuttle} function is allocated to the AUX1 switch on the drive unit, but another function can be allocated instead.

At the factory, the {VTR} function is allocated to the VTR switch on the drive unit, but another function can be allocated instead.

At the factory, the {Frame1} function is allocated to the AUX2 switch on the drive unit, but another function can be allocated instead.

Zoom track function ON/OFF selection E2-14

Function allocation to VTR switch E2-16

Function allocation to AUX1 switch E2-15

Function allocation to AUX2 switch E2-17

"3. MENU Screen" E3-1

Page Page

1

2

3

4

9

10

11

12[Trk]

A 1

A 2

V

R

[ ]

MENU screenMENU

[ I-Tq ] [ I-Gain ]

[ Frm2 ]

[ Frm1 ]

AM

RET switch

Frame Preset2 settings E2-22

Iris gain setting E2-12

Function allocation to seesaw switch E2-29

Iris A/M switch setting E2-28

Iris torque setting E2-25

Frame Preset1 settings E2-19

Function allocation to RET switch E2-18

At the factory, the {Return} function is allocated to the RET switch on the drive unit, but another function can be allocated instead.

The preset speed of framing preset 1 and the zoom or focus operations up to the memory position can be switched to ON or OFF.

The preset speed of framing preset 2 and the zoom or focus operations up to the memory position can be switched to ON or OFF.

The amount of operating force used to operate the iris ring manually can be changed.

The iris gain in the auto or remote mode can be changed.

The movement of the iris A/M switch on the drive unit can be changed.

The iris operation using the zoom seesaw switch can be enabled.

E2-4 E2-5 E2-6 E2-9

Zoom curve mode The characteristics of the zoom speed, which is established in response to the amount by which the zoom seesaw switch is pushed in or the amount by which the thumb ring on the analog demand is tilted, can be changed.

Zoom curve mode setting E2-26

[ Z.M. ]

13

14

5

7

6

8

TO P

S C

R E

E N

E2-4

2.2 Users

2.2 Users

[ ]

User 1 to 9 Detailed settings can be performed for each user who will be performing operations. The settings estab- lished can be saved. The number of users for whom these settings can be performed is 9. (User 1 to 9)

User 0 This is the default user for whom the settings can be changed and used on a temporary basis. The settings cannot be saved.The settings are released when switching to User 1 to 9 or User A (analog mode) or when the power is turned off. When the escape operation is performed, User 0 is set. For details on the escape operation, refer to page E3-26. When User 0 is selected, the factory settings (except for the auto iris gain value, remote iris gain value, F-Hold setting, encoder output setting, Initialize operation setting and Adjustment of Camera Fol Voltage) are established.

User A (analog mode) This is selected when a conventional type of drive unit (with analog specications) is to be operated. When the analog mode is established, the digital functions can no longer be used. The following applies to the drive units when this mode has been set.

The VTR, RET, IRIS A/M and IRIS INST switches perform the functions that correspond to the lettering inscribed on them. The rocker switch serves as a regular zooming switch.

The AUX1, AUX2 and MEMO switches cannot be used. The auto iris gain adjustment can be set by operating the display or the trimmer control. The shuttle shot, frame preset, speed preset and zoom track functions cannot be used.

For details on the analog mode, refer to page E2-6 to E2-11.

E2-5

2.2 Users -User selection (User 0 to 9)

User selection (User 0 to 9) [ ]

[ ] 1

[ ] 2

Set

1 Move the key.

2 Push the key.

Set4 Push the key.

The display starts blinking.

Move the left or right key until the number to be changed to appear.

The display which was blinking is now highlighted to indicate that the change has been entered.

The last setting or default value is highlighted.

3 Move the key or key.

[ I-Gain ] [Trk]OFF Shtl VTRA 1

FRM1A 2

V

RETR

[ ]MENU 1

[ I-Gain ] [Trk]OFF Shtl VTRA 1

FRM1A 2

V

RETR

[ ]MENU 1

[ I-Gain ] [Trk]OFF Shtl VTRA 1

FRM1A 2

V

RETR

[ ]MENU 2

Top initial screen

or SetMENU [ ] 1 Set

Analog mode

Selection item

Setting storage

(D): Default value

0 (D)1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 A Settings cannot be stored. The settings cannot be stored but they can be changed temporarily. The default values are restored by selecting the user or turning off the power of the lens.

Settings can be stored on a user by user basis.

TO P

S C

R E

E N

On the Top screen, the user (User 0 to 9) who will be performing the operations can be switched and the analog mode (User A) can be selected. The detailed User 0 to 9 settings are performed from the MENU screen.(Refer to "3. MENU Screen") For details on selecting the analog mode (User A), refer to the following pages.

E2-6

2.2 Users Analog mode settings (User A)

Analog mode settings (User A)[ ]

User A (analog mode) This is selected when a conventional type of drive unit (with analog specications) is to be operated. When the analog mode is established, the digital functions can no longer be used. The following applies to the drive units when this mode has been set.

The VTR, RET, IRIS A/M and IRIS INST switches perform the functions that correspond to the lettering inscribed on them. The rocker switch serves as a regular zooming switch.

The AUX1, AUX2 and MEMO switches cannot be used. The auto iris gain adjustment can be set by operating the display or the trimmer control. The shuttle shot, frame preset, speed preset and zoom track functions cannot be used.

The displays in the analog mode appear as shown below.

Two types of operations can be performed on the display: the auto iris gain can be adjusted, and the analog mode can be changed to another user. If the lock mode is established, it must be released (Unlock) before these operations can be performed. The password used at the setting stage is required to release the lock mode.

Concerning the password This model does not have a special password setting screen. The password which is established every time a lock operation is performed is the password which is needed to unlock the function. This means that you should make a note of each password. If you have forgotten the password, contact Canon or one of its distributors. Anything from blanks to a maximum of 8 digits can be input as the password.

(NOTE):

Unlocked Locked

[ ] A I G : 5 0 I G : 5 0 [ ] Lock

E2-7

2.2 Users -User selection (User 0 to 9)

1 Move the key, and push the key.

The last setting or default value is blinking.

[ I-Gain ] [Trk]OFF Shtl VTRA 1

FRM1A 2

V

RETR

[ ]MENU 1

Set

Set

Set

3 Push the key.

4 Push the key.

5 The analog mode is established.

2 Move the key or key, and select A.

[ I-Gain ] [Trk]OFF Shtl VTRA 1

FRM1A 2

V

RETR

[ ]MENU 1

[ ] A I G : 5 0

[ ] A I G : 5 0

The display starts blinking.

[Unlock] is highlighted.

AnalogMode Lock / Unlock

Top initial screen

orMENU [ ] 1 Set

Analog mode

Selection item

Setting storage

(D): Default value

[ ] A Set Set

0 (D)1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 A Settings cannot be stored. The settings cannot be stored but they can be changed temporarily. The default values are restored by selecting the user or turning off the power of the lens.

Settings can be stored on a user by user basis.

(1) Setting the analog mode when not locking the settings

[ ]

TO P

S C

R E

E N

E2-8

2.2 Users -User selection (User 0 to 9)

Password

(D) Unlock Lock

MENU [ ] 1 [ ] ASet Set Set

Set Set

: Space

Max.8

Selection item Number of characters

(D) : Default value

(D) : Default value

Selection item

(D) A B C D E F G H I J K L M N O P Q R S T U V W X Y Z a b c d e f g h i j k l m n o p q r s t u v w x y z 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9

or

1 Move the key, and push the key.

The last setting or default value is highlighted.

The display starts blinking.

[Unlock] is highlighted.

[ I-Gain ] [Trk]OFF Shtl VTRA 1

FRM1A 2

V

RETR

[ ]MENU 1

Set

Set

Set

3 Push the key.

2 Move the key or key, and select A.

[ I-Gain ] [Trk]OFF Shtl VTRA 1

FRM1A 2

V

RETR

[ ]MENU 1

[ ] A I G : 5 0

EnterPassword

AnalogMode Lock / Unlock

4 Move the key, and push the key.

Set

Set

5 Input the password, and push the key. Password character input Use the up and down keys to search the characters, and the left and right keys to move from one digit to another or make corrections. Do NOT press the SET key until the password input is complete.

6 Move the key, and push the key.

7 The lock is now set.

EnterPassword

Lock OK? y/n

[ ] Lock I G : 5 0

Top initial screen

(2) Setting the analog mode when locking the settings

[ ]

E2-9

2.2 Users -Analog mode operations (User A)

Analog mode operations (User A) [ ]

Unlocked Locked

[ ] A I G : 5 0 I G : 5 0 [ ] Lock

Two types of operations can be performed on the display: the auto iris gain can be adjusted, and the analog mode can be changed to another user. If the lock mode is established, it must be released (Unlock) before these operations can be per- formed. The password used at the setting stage is required to release the lock mode.

(1) Adjusting the auto iris gain

1 While the IG: area is highlighted, push the key.

The last setting or default is blinking.

Set

[ ] A

3 Push the key.Set

2 Move the key or key.

Move the left or right key until the number to be changed to appear.

The display which was blinking is now highlighted to indicate that the change has been entered.

Note: If the lock mode is established, {Lock} appeears on the display instead of {A}.

I G : 50

I G : 55

[ ] A

I G : 5 0

I G : 5 5

Analog screen

SetSet

01Selection item

Function

99

Minimum gain Maximum gain

I G : 5 0

Default value: This differs depending on the factory setting, but it is the setting established using the iris gain adjusting trimmer.

User A (analog mode) This is selected when a conventional type of drive unit (with analog specications) is to be operated. When the analog mode is established, the digital functions can no longer be used. The following applies to the drive units when this mode has been set. The VTR, RET, IRIS A/M and IRIS INST switches perform the functions that correspond to the lettering

inscribed on them. The rocker switch serves as a regular zooming switch. The AUX1, AUX2 and MEMO switches cannot be used. The auto iris gain adjustment can be set by operating the display or the trimmer control. The shuttle shot, frame preset, speed preset and zoom track functions cannot be used.

The displays in the analog mode appear as shown below.

TO P

S C

R E

E N

E2-10

2.2 Users -Analog mode operations (User A)

(2) Changing the user The procedure for changing from the analog mode to another user depends on the lock mode setting status.

1 Move the key, and push the key.

The display starts blinking.

Set

[ ] A I G : 5 0

[ ] A I G : 5 0

3 Push the key.Set

2 Move the key or key.

Move the left or right key until the number to be changed to appear.

The display which was blinking is now highlighted to indicate that the change has been entered.

[ I-Gain ] [Trk]OFF Shtl VTRA 1

FRM1A 2

V

RETR

[ ]MENU 0

[ I-Gain ] [Trk]OFF Shtl VTRA 1

FRM1A 2

V

RETR

[ ]MENU 0

I :

(Unlocked)

SetSet or I G : 5 0

[ ]

E2-11

2.2 Users -Analog mode operations (User A)

1 Move the key, and push the key.

The display starts blinking.

Set

[ ] Lock I G : 5 0

[ ] Lock I G : 5 0

2 Move the key or key.

I :

EnterPassword

Set3 Input the password, and push the key. Password character input Use the up and down keys to search the characters, and the left and right keys to move from one digit to another or make corrections. Do NOT press the SET key until the password input is complete.

Set4 Move the key, and push the key.

Set

Set

5 Push the key.

EnterPassword

Unlock OK? y/n

[ ] A I G : 5 0

[ ] A I G : 5 0 The display starts blinking.

The display which was blinking is now highlighted to indicate that the change has been entered.

6 Move the key or key, and push the key.

[ I-Gain ] [Trk]OFF Shtl VTRA 1

FRM1A 2

V

RETR

[ ]MENU 1

(Locked)

PasswordorSet Set Set Set

Set

(D) Default value

Max.8

Selection item

Can be input as the password.

Number of characters

I G : 5 0

or

(D) A B C D E F G H I J K L M N O P Q R S T U V W X Y Z a b c d e f g h i j k l m n o p q r s t u v w x y z 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9

[ ]

TO P

S C

R E

E N

E2-12

2.3 Iris gain setting - Auto iris gain setting

The auto iris gain has already been set to the appropriate level at the factory but it can be changed if so desired. There are two ways to change its setting: one involves using the auto iris gain adjusting trimmer (refer to the Lens Manual), and the other is through display operations. The setting established last takes prece- dence.

The same auto iris gain setting is used for all the users regardless of the user who is indicated on the dis- play. For this reason, there is no need to select the user before performing the setting. As an exception to the general rule, any change made in the setting is reected for user 0 as well.

(1) Auto iris gain setting

Note: When adjusting the gain while checking the iris op- eration

-> Check that the A/M switch on the drive unit is set to the [AUTO] mode.

-> Set the camera s iris mode to [AUTO].

Note: Find the iris ring on the lens body, and set it to the position where the maximum gain is achieved without causing hunting.

Note: The iris gain setting will not be reset even when the "Re- setting" procedure described on page 3-6 is initiated. Since the user can no longer refer to the factory setting once this setting has been changed, it is recommended that the factory setting be noted down if it will be re- quired.

The item is now highlighted.

[ I-Gain ] [Trk]OFF Shtl VTRA 1

FRM1A 2

V

RETR

[ ]MENU 1

2 Push the key.Set

5 Push the key.Set

4 Move the key or key.

The display is switched to the [I-Gain] screen.

An underline appears below [Auto]. The last setting or default value is highlighted.

The display returns to Screen A.

Move the left or right key until the value to be changed to appears.

Top initial screen

[I-Gain] screen

3 Move the key.

1 Move the key.

[ I-Gain ] Iris

Remote: 90 Auto: 73

[ ]

[ I-Gain ] Iris

Remote: 90 Auto: 73

[ ]

[ I-Gain ] Iris

Remote: 90 Auto: 71

[ ]

[ I-Gain ] [Trk]OFF Shtl VTRA 1

FRM1A 2

V

RETR

[ ]MENU 1

Screen A

Default value: This differs depending on the factory setting, but it is the setting established using the iris gain adjusting trimmer.

Setor

01Selection item

Function

99

Minimum gain Maximum gain

MENU Set[ I-Gain ]

2.3 Iris gain setting[ I-Gain ]

E2-13

2.3 Iris gain setting -Remote iris gain setting

(2) Remote iris gain setting

Note: When adjusting the gain while checking the iris operation

-> Check that the A/M switch on the drive unit is set to the [AUTO] mode.

-> Set the camera's iris mode to [Remote].

The remote iris gain has already been set to the appropriate level at the factory but it can be changed if so desired.

The same remote iris gain setting is used for all the users regardless of the user who is indicated on the display. For this reason, there is no need to select the user before performing the setting. As an excep- tion to the general rule, any change made in the setting is reected for user 0 as well.

The item is now highlighted.

[ I-Gain ] [Trk]OFF Shtl VTRA 1

FRM1A 2

V

RETR

[ ]MENU 1

2 Push the key.Set

5 Push the key.Set

4 Move the key or key.

The display is switched to the [I-Gain] screen.

An underline appears below [Remote]. The last setting or default value is highlighted.

The display returns to Screen A.

Move the left or right key until the value to be changed to appears.

Top initial screen

I-Gain

3 Move the key twice.

1 Move the key.

[ I-Gain ] Iris

Remote: 90 Auto: 48

[ ]

[ I-Gain ] Iris

Remote: 90 Auto: 48

[ ]

[ I-Gain ] Iris

Remote: 80 Auto: 48

[ ]

[ I-Gain ] [Trk]OFF Shtl VTRA 1

FRM1A 2

V

RETR

[ ]MENU 1

Default value: 90

Setor

01Selection item

Function

99

Minimum gain Maximum gain

MENU Set 2[ I-Gain ]

Note: The iris gain setting will not be reset even when the "Reset- ting" procedure described on page 3-6 is initiated. Since the user can no longer refer to the factory setting once this setting has been changed, it is recommended that the factory setting be noted down if it will be required.

[ I-Gain ]

TO P

S C

R E

E N

E2-14

2.4 Zoom track function ON/OFF selection

This item is used to set the zoom track function to ON or OFF.

1 Move the key, and push the key.

2 Push the key.

4 Push the key.

The display starts blinking.

The display stops blinking and reverts to being highlighted, and the setting is entered.

3 Move the key or key.

[ I-Gain ] [Trk]OFF Shtl VTRA 1

FRM1A 2

V

RETR

[ ]MENU 1

Set

Set

[Trk]OFF

[Trk]ON

[ I-Gain ] [Trk]OFF Shtl VTRA 1

FRM1A 2

V

RETR

[ ]MENU 1

[ I-Gain ] [Trk]ON Shtl VTRA 1

FRM1A 2

V

RETR

[ ]MENU 1

Move the left or right key to set the function to {ON} or {OFF}.

The last setting or default setting is highlighted.

Top initial screen

(D)

(D) Default value

Setor

OFFSelection item ON

MENU Set[Trk]OFF

2.4 Zoom track function ON/OFF selection

Prior to operation, select the user for whom the settings will be made. (For details on how to select the user, refer to page E2-5 or E3-4.)

IMPORTANT

[Trk]

E2-15

2.5 Function allocation to AUX1 switch

This item is used to allocate a function to the AUX1 switch.

Set

1 Move the key twice.

2 Push the key.

Set4 Push the key.

The display starts blinking.

Move the left or right key until the function to be changed to appears.

The display stops blinking and reverts to being highlighted, and the setting is entered.

The function set last or default function is highlighted.

3 Move the key or key.

[ I-Gain ] [Trk]OFF Shtl VTRA 1

FRM1A 2

V

RETR

[ ]MENU 1

[ I-Gain ] [Trk]OFF Shtl VTRA 1

FRM1A 2

V

RETR

[ ]MENU 1

ShtlA 1

VTRA 1

[ I-Gain ] [Trk]OFF VTR VTRA 1

FRM1A 2

V

RETR

[ ]MENU 1

Top initial screen

or Set

(D) Default value

2

Shtl(D) Selection item

Function

NON VTR RET FRM1 FRM2 Sped

Shuttle-Shot button No function VTR switch VTR switch Framing Preset1

switch Framing Preset2

switch Speed Preset

switch

MENU SetShtlA 1

2.5 Function allocation to AUX1 switch A 1

TO P

S C

R E

E N

Prior to operation, select the user for whom the settings will be made. (For details on how to select the user, refer to page E2-5 or E3-4.)

IMPORTANT

E2-16

2.6 Function allocation to VTR switch

This item is used to allocate a function to the VTR switch.

Set

1 Move the key twice and the key once.

2 Push the key.

Set4 Push the key.

[ I-Gain ] [Trk]OFF Shtl VTRA 1

FRM1A 2

V

RETR

[ ]MENU 1

[ I-Gain ] [Trk]OFF Shtl VTRA 1

FRM1A 2

V

RETR

[ ]MENU 1

[ I-Gain ] [Trk]OFF Shtl RETA 1

FRM1A 2

V

RETR

[ ]MENU 1

VTRV

RETV

The display starts blinking.

Move the left or right key until the function to be changed to appears.

The display stops blinking and reverts to being highlighted, and the setting is entered.

The function set last or default function is highlighted.

3 Move the key or key.

Top initial screen

or2 Set

(D) Default value

(D) ShtlSelection item VTR

Function

RET FRM1 FRM2 Sped

Shuttle-Shot buttonVTR switch RET switch Framing Preset1

switch Framing Preset2

switch Speed Preset

switch

MENU SetVTRV

2.6 Function allocation to VTR switchV

Prior to operation, select the user for whom the settings will be made. (For details on how to select the user, refer to page E2-5 or E3-4.)

IMPORTANT

E2-17

2.7 Function allocation to AUX2 switch

This item is used to allocate a function to the AUX2 switch.

Set

1 Move the key three times.

2 Push the key.

[ I-Gain ] [Trk]OFF Shtl VTRA 1

FRM1A 2

V

RETR

[ ]MENU 1

[ Frm1 ] [ Frm2 ]

Shtl VTRA 1

FRM1A 2

V

RETR

[ ]MENU 1

[ Frm1 ] [ Frm2 ]

Shtl VTRA 1

ShtlA 2

V

RETR

[ ]MENU 1

FRM1A 2

ShtlA 2

Set4 Push the key.

The display starts blinking.

Move the left or right key until the function to be changed to appears.

The display stops blinking and reverts to being highlighted, and the setting is entered.

The function set last or default function is highlighted.

3 Move the key or key.

Top initial screen

or3 SetMENU SetA 1 FRM1A 2

(D) Default value

Shtl(D) Selection item

Function

NON VTR RETFRM1 FRM2 Sped

Shuttle-Shot button No function VTR switch RET switchFraming Preset1

switch Framing Preset2

switch Speed Preset

switch

2.7 Function allocation to AUX2 switch A 2

TO P

S C

R E

E N

Prior to operation, select the user for whom the settings will be made. (For details on how to select the user, refer to page E2-5 or E3-4.)

IMPORTANT

E2-18

2.8 Function allocation to RET switch

This item is used to allocate a function to the RET switch.

Set

1 Move the key three times and move the key once.

2 Push the key.

Set4 Push the key.

[ I-Gain ] [Trk]OFF Shtl VTRA 1

FRM1A 2

V

RETR

[ ]MENU 1

RETR

FRM2R

1

[ Frm1 ] [ Frm2 ]

Shtl VTRA 1

FRM1A 2

V

RETR

[ ]MENU

1

[ Frm1 ] [ Frm2 ]

Shtl VTRA 1

FRM1A 2

V

FRM2R

[ ]MENU

The display starts blinking.

The display stops blinking and reverts to being highlighted, and the setting is entered.

The function set last or default function is highlighted.

Move the left or right key until the function to be changed to appears.

3 Move the key or key.

Top initial screen

or3 Set

(D) Default value

(D) Shtl VTRRET FRM1 FRM2 Sped

Shuttle-Shot button VTR switchRET switch

Selection item

Function Framing Preset1 switch

Framing Preset2 switch

Speed Preset switch

MENU SetA 1 RETR

2.8 Function allocation to RET switchR

Prior to operation, select the user for whom the settings will be made. (For details on how to select the user, refer to page E2-5 or E3-4.)

IMPORTANT

E2-19

2.9 Frame Preset1 settings - Frame Preset1 preset speed setting

(1) Frame Preset1 preset speed setting

This makes it possible to select whether to use the preset speed or maximum speed to move to the memory position. (Bear in mind that the display is switched to another screen when this speed is set.)

Note: If {PRE} is selected, set the speed. (See page 3-42)

1 Move the key four times.

2 Push the key.

3 Move the key or key.

4 Push the key.

The display is switched to the Preset screen, and an underline appears below [Frame1]. The last setting or default value is highlighted.

The display returns to Screen A.

The item is now highlighted.

Top initial screen

Screen A

Preset screen

[ I-Gain ] [Trk]OFF Shtl VTRA 1

FRM1A 2

V

RETR

[ ]MENU 1

Move the left or right key to select {PRE} or {FAST}.

Set

Set

1

[ I-Tq ] H [ Z.M. ] [ Frm1 ] [ Frm2 ]

FRM1A 2 RETR

[ ]MENU

Frame1: Preset

PRE

Focus: OFF Zoom: ON

Frame1: Preset

FAST

Focus: OFF Zoom: ON

This item does not appear with the "R" type lens.

(D) Default value

(D)

Setor

PRESelection item

Function

FAST

Operation at the preset speed

Operation at the maximum speed

MENU Set4 [ Frm1 ]

2.9 Frame Preset1 settings [ Frm1 ]

TO P

S C

R E

E N

Prior to operation, select the user for whom the settings will be made. (For details on how to select the user, refer to page E2-5 or E3-4.)

IMPORTANT

E2-20

2.9 Frame Preset1 settings - Frame Preset1 zoom ON/OFF selection

(2) Frame Preset1 zoom ON/OFF selection

This makes it possible to select enable or disable for the zoom operations up to the memory position. (Bear in mind that the display is switched to another screen when this zoom operation is set.)

1 Move the key four times.

2 Push the key.

3 Move the key.

4 Move the key or key.

The display is switched to the Preset screen.

An underline appears below [Zoom]. The last setting or default value is highlighted.

Move the left or right key to set the function to {ON} or {OFF}.

5 Push the key.

The display returns to Screen A.

The item is now highlighted.

Top initial screen

Preset screen

[ I-Gain ] [Trk]OFF Shtl VTRA 1

FRM1A 2

V

RETR

[ ]MENU 1

Frame1: PRE

Focus: OFF Zoom: ON

Preset

Frame1: PRE

Focus: OFF Zoom: OFF

Preset

Screen A

Set

Set

1

[ I-Tq ] H [ Z.M. ] [ Frm1 ] [ Frm2 ]

FRM1A 2 RETR

[ ]MENU

Frame1: Preset

PRE

Focus: OFF Zoom: ON This item does not appear

with the "R" type lens.

(D) Default value

(D)

Setor

ONSelection item

Function

OFF

Zoom operations enabled Zoom operations disabled

MENU Set4 [ Frm1 ]

[ Frm1 ]

Prior to operation, select the user for whom the settings will be made. (For details on how to select the user, refer to page E2-5 or E3-4.)

IMPORTANT

E2-21

2.9 Frame Preset1 settings - Frame Preset1 focus ON/OFF selection ("A" type lens only)

(3) Frame Preset1 focus ON/OFF selection ("A" type lens only)

This makes it possible to select enable or disable for the focus operations up to the memory position. (Bear in mind that the display is switched to another screen when this focus operation is set.)

Note: This item can be selected with the "A" type lens only. There is no [Focus] display with the "R" type lens.

1 Move the key four times.

2 Push the key.

3 Move the key twice.

The display is switched to the Preset screen.

An underline appears below [Focus]. The last setting or default value is highlighted.

5 Push the key.

The display returns to Screen A.

The item is now highlighted.

Top initial screen

Screen A

Preset screen

[ I-Gain ] [Trk]OFF Shtl VTRA 1

FRM1A 2

V

RETR

[ ]MENU 1

Frame1: Preset

PRE

Focus: OFF Zoom: ON

Frame1: Preset

PRE

Focus: ON Zoom: ON

1

[ I-Tq ] H [ Z.M. ] [ Frm1 ] [ Frm2 ]

FRM1A 2 RETR

[ ]MENU

Set

Set

Frame1: Preset

PRE

Focus: OFF Zoom: ON

4 Move the key or key.

Move the left or right key to set the function to {ON} or {OFF}.

(D) Default value

(D)

Setor

ONSelection item

Function

OFF

Focus operations enabledFocus operations disabled

MENU Set4 [ Frm1 ] 2

[ Frm1 ]

TO P

S C

R E

E N

Prior to operation, select the user for whom the settings will be made. (For details on how to select the user, refer to page E2-5 or E3-4.)

IMPORTANT

E2-22

2.10 Frame Preset2 settings - Frame Preset2 preset speed setting

(1) Frame Preset2 preset speed setting

This makes it possible to select whether to use the preset speed or maximum speed to move to the memory position. (Bear in mind that the display is switched to another screen when this speed is set.)

Note: If {PRE} is selected, set the speed. (See page E3-42)

1 Move the key four times and the key once.

2 Push the key.

3 Move the key or key.

4 Push the key.

The display is switched to the Preset screen, and an underline appears below [Frame2]. The last setting or default value is highlighted.

The item is now highlighted.

Top initial screen

Screen A

Preset screen

[ I-Gain ] [Trk]OFF Shtl VTRA 1

FRM1A 2

V

RETR

[ ]MENU 1

Move the left or right key to select {PRE} or {FAST}.

1

[ I-Tq ] H [ Z.M. ] [ Frm1 ]

FRM1A 2 RETR

[ ]MENU

[ Frm2 ]

The display returns to Screen A.

Set

Set

Frame2: Preset

PRE

Focus: OFF Zoom: ON

Frame2: Preset

FAST

Focus: OFF Zoom: ON

This item does not appear with the "R" type lens.

(D) Default value

(D)

Setor

PRESelection item

Function

FAST

Operation at the preset speed

Operation at the maximum speed

MENU Set4 [ Frm2 ]

2.10 Frame Preset2 settings[ Frm2 ]

Prior to operation, select the user for whom the settings will be made. (For details on how to select the user, refer to page E2-5 or E3-4.)

IMPORTANT

E2-23

2.10 Frame Preset2 settings - Frame Preset2 zoom ON/OFF selection

(2) Frame Preset2 zoom ON/OFF selection

This makes it possible to select enable or disable for the zoom operations up to the memory position. (Bear in mind that the display is switched to another screen when this zoom operation is set.)

1 Move the key four times and the key once.

2 Push the key.

3 Move the key.

4 Move the key or key.

The display is switched to the Preset screen.

An underline appears below [Zoom]. The last setting or default value is highlighted.

Move the left or right key to set the function to {ON} or {OFF}.

5 Push the key.

The display returns to Screen A.

The item is now highlighted.

Top initial screen

Preset screen

[ I-Gain ] [Trk]OFF Shtl VTRA 1

FRM1A 2

V

RETR

[ ]MENU 1

Frame2: PRE

Focus: OFF Zoom: ON

Preset

Frame2: PRE

Focus: OFF Zoom: OFF

Preset

Screen A

1

[ I-Tq ] H [ Z.M. ] [ Frm1 ]

FRM1A 2 RETR

[ ]MENU

[ Frm2 ]

Set

Set

Frame2: Preset

PRE

Focus: OFF Zoom: ON

This item does not appear with the "R" type lens.

(D) Default value

(D)

Setor

ONSelection item

Function

OFF

Zoom operations enabled Zoom operations disabled

MENU Set4 [ Frm2 ]

[ Frm2 ]

TO P

S C

R E

E N

Prior to operation, select the user for whom the settings will be made. (For details on how to select the user, refer to page E2-5 or E3-4.)

IMPORTANT

E2-24

2.10 Frame Preset2 settings - Frame Preset2 focus ON/OFF selection ("A" type lens only)

(3) Frame Preset2 focus ON/OFF selection ("A" type lens only)

This makes it possible to select enable or disable for the focus operations up to the memory position. (Bear in mind that the display is switched to another screen when the focus operation is set.)

Note: This item can be selected with the "A" type lens only. There is no [Focus] display with the "R" type lens.

1 Move the key four times and the key once.

2 Push the key.

3 Move the key twice.

The display is switched to the Preset screen.

An underline appears below [Focus]. The last setting or default value is highlighted.

5 Push the key.

The display returns to Screen A.

The item is now highlighted.

Top initial screen

Screen A

Preset screen

[ I-Gain ] [Trk]OFF Shtl VTRA 1

FRM1A 2

V

RETR

[ ]MENU 1

Frame2: Preset

PRE

Focus: OFF Zoom: ON

Frame2: Preset

PRE

Focus: ON Zoom: ON

Set

Set

Frame2: Preset

PRE

Focus: OFF Zoom: ON

4 Move the key or key.

Move the left or right key to set the function to {ON} or {OFF}.

1

[ I-Tq ] H [ Z.M. ] [ Frm1 ]

FRM1A 2 RETR

[ ]MENU

[ Frm2 ]

(D) Default value

(D)

Setor

ONSelection item

Function

OFF

Focus operations enabledFocus operations disabled

MENU Set4 [ Frm2 ] 2

[ Frm2 ]

Prior to operation, select the user for whom the settings will be made. (For details on how to select the user, refer to page E2-5 or E3-4.)

IMPORTANT

E2-25

2.11 Iris torque setting

This makes it possible to select the amount of force used to manually operate the iris ring.

The display starts blinking.

[ I-Gain ] [Trk]OFF Shtl VTRA 1

FRM1A 2

V

RETR

[ ]MENU 1

2 Push the key.Set

4 Push the key.Set

1 Move the key five times.

[ Frm1 ] [ Frm2 ] [ ]MENU 1

NormAM Zoom [ Z.M. ][ I-Tq ] H

[ Frm1 ] [ Frm2 ] [ ]MENU 1

NormAM Zoom [ Z.M. ][ I-Tq ] L

[ I-Tq ] H

[ I-Tq ] L

The display stops blinking and reverts to being highlighted, and the setting is entered.

The last setting or default value is highlighted.

3 Move the key or key.

Move the left or right key to set the function to {H} or {L}.

Top initial screen

(D) Default value

(D)

Setor

HSelection item

Function

L

High operating force Low operating force

MENU Set5 [ I-Tq ] H

2.11 Iris torque setting [ I-Tq ]

TO P

S C

R E

E N

Prior to operation, select the user for whom the settings will be made. (For details on how to select the user, refer to page E2-5 or E3-4.)

IMPORTANT

E2-26

2.12 Zoom curve mode setting - Seesaw switch curve characteristics setting

(1) Seesaw switch curve characteristics setting

This item makes it possible to change the zoom speed characteristics which is established in response to the amount by which the zoom seesaw switch is pushed in. (Bear in mind that the display is switched to another screen when these characteristics are set.)

2 Push the key.

4 Move the key or key.

The display is switched to the CurveMode screen.

An underline appears below [Seesaw]. The last setting or default value is highlighted.

The display returns to Screen A.

The item is now highlighted.

3 Move the key.

5 Push the key.

Move the left or right key until the number to be changed to appears.

[ I-Tq ] H [ Frm1 ] [ Frm2 ]

[ ]MENU 1

NormAM

[ Z.M. ]

[ I-Gain ] [Trk]OFF Shtl VTRA 1

FRM1A 2

V

RETR

[ ]MENU 1

Zoom

Set

Set

CurveMode Zoom

Demand: Seesaw: 5

5

[ ]

CurveMode Zoom

Demand: Seesaw:

[ ]

D5 5

CurveMode Zoom

Demand: Seesaw:

[ ]

3 5

Screen A

Top initial screen

CurveMode screen

1 Move the key five times and the key once.

D Default value

[ Z.M. ]MENU Set Setor5

1Selection item 2 3 4 D5 6 7 8 9

(1)

(9)

Zo om

s pe

ed

MAX

Amount by which zoom seesaw switch is pushed in Zoom direction

Wide angle Telephoto

Amount of change resulting from zoom mode adjustment

2.12 Zoom curve mode setting[ Z.M. ]

Prior to operation, select the user for whom the settings will be made. (For details on how to select the user, refer to page E2-5 or E3-4.)

IMPORTANT

E2-27

2.12 Zoom curve mode setting - Analog demand curve characteristics setting

(2) Analog demand curve characteristics setting

This item makes it possible to change the zoom speed characteristics which is established in response to the amount by which the analog demand is tilted. (Bear in mind that the display is switched to another screen when these characteristics are set.)

2 Push the key.

4 Move the key or key.

The display is switched to the CurveMode screen.

The display returns to Screen A.

The item is now highlighted.

3 Move the key twice.

5 Push the key.

CurveMode Zoom

Demand: Seesaw:

[ ] Move the left or right key until the number to be changed to appears.

An underline appears below [Demand]. The last setting or default value is highlighted.

[ I-Tq ] H [ Frm1 ] [ Frm2 ]

[ ]MENU 1

NormAM

[ Z.M. ]

1 Move the key five times and the key once.

[ I-Gain ] [Trk]OFF Shtl VTRA 1

FRM1A 2

V

RETR

[ ]MENU 1

Zoom

Set

Set

CurveMode Zoom

Demand: Seesaw: 5

5

[ ]

CurveMode Zoom

Demand: Seesaw:

[ ]

D5

8 5

5

Screen A

CurveMode screen

Top initial screen

or[ Z.M. ] 2 SetMENU Set

D Default value

1Selection item 2 3 4 D5 6 7 8 9

5

(1)

(9)

Zo om

s pe

ed

MAX

Amount by which analog demand is tilted Zoom direction

Wide angle Telephoto

Amount of change resulting from zoom mode adjustment

[ Z.M. ]

TO P

S C

R E

E N

Prior to operation, select the user for whom the settings will be made. (For details on how to select the user, refer to page E2-5 or E3-4.)

IMPORTANT

E2-28

2.13 Iris A/M switch setting

A function can be allocated to the iris A/M switch which is located on the top of the drive unit.

[ I-Gain ] [Trk]OFF Shtl VTRA 1

FRM1A 2

V

RETR

[ ]MENU 1

NormAM

ReveAM

Set

1 Move the key six times.

2 Push the key.

Set4 Push the key.

The display starts blinking.

Move the left or right key until the function to be changed to appears.

The display stops blinking and reverts to being highlighted, and the setting is entered.

The last setting function or default function is highlighted.

3 Move the key or key.

Top initial screen

[ Frm1 ] [ Frm2 ] [ ]MENU 1

Zoom [ Z.M. ][ I-Tq ] H

NormAM

[ Frm1 ] [ Frm2 ] [ ]MENU 1

Zoom [ Z.M. ][ I-Tq ] H

ReveAM

(D) Default value

(D)

Setor

NormSelection item

Function

Reve

Normal operation A Auto / M Manual

Reverse operation A Manual / M Auto A Auto / M Auto A Manual / M Manual

Auto Manu

Auto Only Manual Only

MENU Set6 NormAM

2.13 Iris A/M switch settingAM

Prior to operation, select the user for whom the settings will be made. (For details on how to select the user, refer to page E2-5 or E3-4.)

IMPORTANT

E2-29

2.14 Function allocation to seesaw switch

The {Zoom} or {Iris} operation function can be allocated to the zoom seesaw switch.

Precautions when the iris function has been allocated Note 1: Zoom operations cannot be performed using the seesaw switch. Note 2: Before the iris is to be operated using the rocker switch, the iris mode must be set to MANUAL. Note 3: When the TELE side is pushed down, the iris operation is set to the OPEN side; conversely, when the

WIDE side is pushed down, it is set to the CLOSE side. Note 4: The zoom speed adjustment function takes effect, and the maximum iris speed can be changed. (See

page E3-59)

[ I-Gain ] [Trk]OFF Shtl VTRA 1

FRM1A 2

V

RETR

[ ]MENU 1

Zoom

Iris

Set

1 Move the key six times and the key once.

2 Push the key.

Set4 Push the key.

The display starts blinking.

Move the left or right key to select {Zoom} or {Iris}.

The display stops blinking and reverts to being highlighted, and the setting is entered.

The last setting function or default function is highlighted.

3 Move the key or key.

Top initial screen

[ I-Tq ] H [ Frm1 ] [ Frm2 ]

[ ]MENU 1

NormAM Zoom [ Z.M. ]

[ I-Tq ] H [ Frm1 ] [ Frm2 ]

[ ]MENU 1

NormAM Iris [ Z.M. ]

(D) Default value

(D)

Setor

ZoomSelection item

Function

Iris

Zoom operations Iris operations

MENU Set6 Zoom

2.14 Function allocation to seesaw switch

Prior to operation, select the user for whom the settings will be made. (For details on how to select the user, refer to page E2-5 or E3-4.)

IMPORTANT

TO P

S C

R E

E N

E3-1

3 MENU Screen

E3-2

3.1 MENU screen

3.1 MENU Screen

[ I-Gain ] [Trk]OFF Shtl VTRA 1

FRM1A 2

V

RETR

[ ]MENU 1 [ ] A I G : 5 0

Iris [ ] [ I-Gain ] Torque: High Comp: ON

Fol. Iris: Zoom: Focus:

0940 0527

0011

1

Switch 1

VTR:V

A 1

AUX2:A 2

VTR

AUX1: FRM1 ShtlNo. :

User 1

Name: ResetAll

1

Frame1: Preset

PRE Frame2: PRE ZSpeed: 800

: Go Top : BackSet

Set

1 2

3

4

56

7

8

1

2

3

5

6

7

4 8

Tracking: F-Hold: OFF

OFF

Movement

Zoom [ ] CurveMode

Focus [ ]

Info Encoder: Initialize CamSeri: ON

OFF

(A)

(A )

(0 to 9)

(0 to

9 )

Analog mode screen: The analog mode screen appears when User A has been selected. User is displayed for (A) or (0 to 9).

Set

Set

Switch screen E3-27

Zoom screen E3-51

Fol. screen E3-75

Preset screen E3-35

Focus screen E3-65

User screen E3-3

Info screen E3-67

Iris screen E3-45

Top initial screen Analog mode screen

MENU screen

Zoom screenFocus screen

Fol. screen

Info screen

key

key

key To Go Top screen

To User screen

To Top screen

key

key

To the screen in the counterclockwise direction

To the screen in the clockwise direction

User screen Switch screen

Preset screen

Iris screen

Go Top screen

Page Page

All the 33 setting items and the 3 follow-up relative values displays on this information display can be set or indicated on the MENU screen*. The MENU screen is organized as 8 different function screens (or 7 different function screens for the R type lens): the User screen, Switch screen, Preset screen, Iris screen, Zoom screen, Focus screen, (only for the A type lens), Info screen, and Fol. screen. When [MENU] on the Top screen is selected and the Set key is pushed, the User screen is the first to appear. The display can be switched to the other 7 screens by pushing the left key or right key. (See figure below)

*: There is no screen which is actually called the MENU screen, but the 8 screens mentioned above are collectively referred to as the MENU screen.

A setting item with the display at the side of a function title can also be set on the Top screen.Top

E3-3

3.2 User Screen

3.2 User Screen

There are three categories of users, each of which is described below.

User 1 to 9 Detailed settings can be performed for each user who will be performing operations. The settings estab- lished can be saved. The number of users for whom these settings can be performed is 9. (User 1 to 9)

User 0 This is the default user for whom the settings can be changed and used on a temporary basis. The settings cannot be saved.The settings are released when switching to User 1 to 9 or User A (analog mode) or when the power is turned off. When the escape operation is performed, User 0 is set. For details on the escape operation, refer to page E3-26. When User 0 is selected, the factory settings (except for the auto iris gain value, remote iris gain value, F-Hold setting, encoder output setting, Initialize operation setting and Adjustment of Camera Fol Voltage) are estab- lished.

User A (analog mode) This is selected when a conventional type of drive unit (with analog specifications) is to be operated. When the analog mode is established, the digital functions can no longer be used. The following applies to the drive units when this mode has been set.

The VTR, RET, IRIS A/M and IRIS INST switches perform the functions that correspond to the lettering inscribed on them. The rocker switch serves as a regular zooming switch.

The AUX1, AUX2 and MEMO switches cannot be used. The auto iris gain adjustment can be set by operating the display or the trimmer control. The shuttle shot, frame preset, speed preset and zoom track functions cannot be used.

For details on the analog mode, refer to page E3-19 to E3-25. Page

User selection (User 0 to 9) ............................................................................................................. E3-4

Giving names to the users ................................................................................................................... E3-5

Resetting

(1) Resetting the settings for one user ............................................................................................. E3-6

(2) Resetting the settings for all the users ....................................................................................... E3-7

Copying the settings established for one user to another user ........................................................... E3-8

Copying data betweenLenses

(1) Copying the data settings established for one user into another lens ...................................... E3-10

(2) Copying the data settings established for all the users into another lens ................................ E3-12

(3) When an error display has appeared ....................................................................................... E3-14

Lock mode setting (User 0 to 9) ........................................................................................................ E3-15

Analog mode settings (User A) .......................................................................................................... E3-19

Analog mode operations (User A) ..................................................................................................... E3-23

Escape operation .............................................................................................................................. E3-26

Top

Top denotes an item whose setting can be changed also on the Top screen.

M E

N U

S C

R E

E N

Top

Top

E3-4

3.2 User Screen - User selection (User 0 to 9)

User selection (User 0 to 9)

The display is switched to the User screen.

Top initial screen

User screen

2 Move the key.

[ I-Gain ] [Trk]OFF Shtl VTRA 1

FRM1A 2

V

RETR

[ ]MENU 1

3 Move the key or key.

An underline appears below [No.]. The last setting or default value is highlighted.

Move the left or right key until the number to be changed to appears.

1 Push the key. Set

No. : User

1 Name: ResetAll

1

No. : User

Name: ResetAll

1 1

No. : User

Name: ResetAll

2 2

or SetMENU Set User 1

Settings can be stored on a user by user basis. Analog mode

Settings cannot be stored. The settings cannot be stored but they can be changed temporarily. The default values are restored by selecting the user or turning off the power of the lens.

Selection item

Setting storage

0 (D)1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 A

(D) Default value

The user (User 0 to 9) who will be performing the operations can be switched and the analog mode (User A) can be selected. For details on the analog mode (User A), refer to pages E3-19 to E3-25. The User No. is switched to perform settings by individual user.

Top

E3-5

3.2 User Screen - Giving names to the users

2 Move the key twice.

3 Push the key.

[ I-Gain ] [Trk]OFF Shtl VTRA 1

FRM1A 2

V

RETR

[ ]MENU 1

1 Push the key.Set

Set

Name User

Name:

1 {} of the first character is highlighted, indicating the status in which a change can be made.

Set5 Push the key to enter the change.

The display is switched to the Title Name.

Name User

Name: A

1

No. : User

1 Name: ResetAll

1

No. : User

Name: ResetAll

1 1

No. : User

Name: ResetAll

1 1

A

The display is switched to the User screen.

Top initial screen

User screen

Title Name

4 Move the key or key.

An underline appears below [Name].

Move the left or right key until the number to be changed to appears.

or SetMENU

(D) Default value Space

Set User 1 Set2

Max.8

Selection item

Number of characters

(D) A B C D E F G H I J K L M N O P Q R S T U V W X Y Z a b c d e f g h i j k l m n o p q r s t u v w x y z 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9

A name can be given to each of the users.

Giving names to the users

Prior to operation, select the user for whom the settings will be made. (For details on how to select the user, refer to page E2-5 or E3-4.)

IMPORTANT

Top

M E

N U

S C

R E

E N

E3-6

3.2 User Screen - Resetting the settings for one user

The display is switched to the User screen.

2 Move the key three times.

3 Push the key.

4 Move the key.

[ I-Gain ] [Trk]OFF Shtl VTRA 1

FRM1A 2

V

RETR

[ ]MENU 1

Name: User

ResetAll Copy

1

User 1 Reset Now.

ResetAll User

User: AllUser:

1

y/n y/n

Name: User

ResetAll Copy

1

1 Push the key.Set

The operator is asked whether the pre-selected user is to be reset.

The display is switched to the Reset screen.

Set6 Push the key to enter the decision.

The screen temporarily shows "Now resetting," and the display returns to Title Reset. This completes the resetting.

5 Move the key to select {y}.

Set

No. : User

1 Name: ResetAll

1

ResetAll User

User: AllUser:

1

y/n y/n

ResetAll User

User: AllUser:

1

y/n y/n

A

A

Top initial screen

User screen

Title Reset

Title Reset

Reset screen

An underline appears below [ResetAll].

or SetMENU Set User 1 Set3

(1) Resetting the settings for one user The settings established for one user can be reset so that they can return to the default values.

The operating steps taken be- tween steps 1 to 5 (within the two dotted parallel lines) can be undone without resetting the settings. To return to the original screen, move the up key. To turn off the display without resetting the settings, push the DISPLAY switch.

Note: The iris gain, F-Hold setting, Encoder output setting, Initialize opera- tion setting and Camera Fol Voltage are the only values which are not reset. The value established prior to initialization remains unchanged.

Resetting

Prior to operation, select the user for whom the settings will be made. (For details on how to select the user, refer to page E2-5 or E3-4.)

IMPORTANT

E3-7

3.2 User Screen - Resetting the settings for all the users

The display is switched to the User screen.

2 Move the key three times.

3 Push the key.

4 Move the key twice.

[ I-Gain ] [Trk]OFF Shtl VTRA 1

FRM1A 2

V

RETR

[ ]MENU 1

Name: User

ResetAll Copy

1

All User Reset Now.

ResetAll User

User: AllUser:

1

y/n y/n

Name: User

ResetAll Copy

1

ResetAll User

User: AllUser:

1

y/n y/n

1 Push the key.Set

Set

The operator is asked whether the settings of all the users are to be reset or not.

The display is switched to the Reset screen.

Set6 Push the key to enter the decision.

The screen temporarily shows "Now resetting," and the display returns to Title Reset. This completes the resetting.

5 Move the key to select {y}.

No. : User

1 Name: ResetAll

1

A

A

Top initial screen

User screen

Title Reset

Title Reset

Reset screen

An underline appears below [ResetAll].

ResetAll User

User: AllUser:

1

y/n y/n

or SetMENU Set User 1 Set3 2

(2) Resetting the settings for all the users

The settings established for all the user can be reset so that they can return to the default values.

Note: There is no need to select a user.

The operating steps taken be- tween steps 1 to 5 (within the two dotted parallel lines) can be undone without resetting the settings. To return to the original screen, move the up key. To turn off the display without resetting the settings, push the DISPLAY switch.

Note: The iris gain, F-Hold setting, Encoder output setting, Initialize operation setting and Cam- era Fol Voltage are the only values which are not reset. The value established prior to initialization remains unchanged.

M E

N U

S C

R E

E N

E3-8

3.2 User Screen - Copying the settings established for one user to another user

3 Push the key.

6 Move the key.

Continued on next page

5 Move the key or key.

[ I-Gain ] [Trk]OFF Shtl VTRA 1

FRM1A 2

V

RETR

[ ]MENU 1

Copy User

To No. : Copy:

1

y/n 1

Copy User

To No. : Copy:

1

y/n 3

Copy User

To No. : Copy:

1

3 y/n

ResetAll User

Copy ToOtherLens

1

Copy User

To No. : Copy:

1

1 y/n

1 Push the key.Set

2 Move the key twice.

4 Move the key.

Set

An underline appears below [Copy], and either {y} (YES) or {n} (NO) can now been selected.

An underline appears below [To No.].

Move the left or right key until the user serving as the copy destination appears.

No. : User

1 Name: ResetAll

1 The display is switched to the User screen.

The display is switched to the Copy screen.

Top initial screen

User screen

Screen A

Copy screen

An underline appears below [Copy].

The settings established for one user can be copied to another user.

The operating steps taken be- tween steps 1 to 7 (within the two dotted parallel lines) can be un- done without copying the settings. To return to the original screen, move the up key. To turn off the display without copying the set- tings, push the DISPLAY switch.

Prior to operation, select the user for whom the settings will be made. (For details on how to select the user, refer to page E2-5 or E3-4.)

IMPORTANT

Copying the settings established for one user to another user

E3-9

3.2 User Screen - 1 1

or

Set

MENU Set User 1 Set4

ResetAll User

Copy ToOtherLens

1

Select {y}.

Set8 Push the key. The settings are copied into the specified user number, and the display returns to Screen A.

7 Move the key.

Continued from Previous page

Copy User

To No. : Copy:

1

3 y/n

M E

N U

S C

R E

E N

E3-10

3.2 User Screen - Copying data between lenses

With the drive unit installed the information display, the setting establisbed on the information display can be copied into another information display drive unit.There are two copy types.1:Copying the data settings established for one user (See this page). 2:Copying the data settings established for all the users (See the page E3-12).A dedicated cable purchased separately is required for this operation. For further details,consult a Canon sales representative or your Canon dealer.

(1) Copying the data settings established for one user into another lens

3 Push the key.

Continued on next page

[ I-Gain ] [Trk]OFF Shtl VTRA 1

FRM1A 2

V

RETR

[ ]MENU 1

ToOtherLens User

Connect:

1

y/n

ToOtherLens User

Connect:

1

y/n

ToOtherLens User

Connect:

1

y/n

1 Push the key.Set

2 Move the key five times.

4 Move the key.

Set

Set

An underline appears below [Connect], and either {y} (YES) or {n} (NO) can now been selected.

5 Move the key, and select {y}.

No. : User

1 Name: ResetAll

1 The display is switched to the User screen.

The display is switched to the ToOtherLens screen.

Top initial screen

User screen

Screen A

ResetAll User

Copy ToOtherLens

1

Screen B

ToOtherLens screen

An underline appears below [ToOtherLens].

ToOtherLens User

UserCopy : AllCopy :

1

y/n y/n

6 Push the key. The display is switched to the Screen B.

7 Move the key.

The operating steps taken be- tween steps 1 to 12 (within the two dotted parallel lines) can be undone without copying the set- tings. To return to the original screen, move the up key. To turn off the display without copying the settings, push the DISPLAY switch.

Preparations prior to operation (Be absolutely sure to undertake these preparations.) 1.Plug one end of the dedicated cable (20P-20P) into the zoom remote & focus remote connector (20-pin) of

the copy source lens and the other end into the corresponding connector of the copy destination lens. 2.Turn on the power of the copy source lens and copy destination lens. 3. Push the DISPLAY switch on the copy source lens to turn on the display. (Do not turn on the display of the

copy destination lens.)

Copying data between lenses

Prior to operation, select the user for whom the settings will be made. (For details on how to select the user, refer to page E2-5 or E3-4.)

IMPORTANT

E3-11

3.2 User Screen - Copying data between lenses

Set

SetMENU

Set

Set User 1 Set5

or

Continued from Previous page

8 Push the key.

ToOtherLens User

To No. : Copy:

1

1 y/n

User screen

Copy selection screen The display is switched to the Copy Selection screen.

The display is switched to the User screen.

10 Move the or key.

ToOtherLens User

To No. : Copy:

1

y/n 1

ToOtherLens User

To No. : Copy:

1

y/n 3

Move the left or right key until the number of the user, to whom the settings are to be copied, at the copy destination lens appears.

11 Move the key.

9 Move the key. An underline appears below [To No.].

An underline appears below [Copy], and either {y} (YES) or {n} (NO) can now been selected.

Set13 Push the key.

12 Move the key, and select {y}.

Now Data Copy Please Wait...

The screen now shows the "Now Data Copy" message for a few moments before returning to Screen A. This completes the copying of the settings between the lenses.

ResetAll User

Copy ToOtherLens

1

Screen A

Set

ToOtherLens User

To No. : Copy:

1

y/n 3

ToOtherLens User

To No. : Copy:

1

y/n 3

2

1

ToOtherLens User

UserCopy : AllCopy :

1

y/n y/n

*1: If the Set key is pushed here, copying is actually com- menced. Bear in mind that once copying starts, it will not be possible to restore the data in the copy destination lens to the original data.

*2: Refrain from operating the op- eration switch or pushing the DISPLAY switch on either the copy source lens or copy des- tination lens while the settings are being copied. Otherwise, the copying operation may not be conducted properly.

Note: If the settings were not copied successfully, an error message will appear. For details on what remedial action to take, refer to "(3) When an error display has appeared" on page E3-14.

M E

N U

S C

R E

E N

E3-12

3.2 User Screen - Copying data between lenses

(2) Copying the data settings established for all the users into another lens

A dedicated cable purchased separately is required for this operation. For further details, consult a Canon sales representative or your dealer.

3 Push the key.

[ I-Gain ] [Trk]OFF Shtl VTRA 1

FRM1A 2

V

RETR

[ ]MENU 1

ResetAll User

Copy ToOtherLens

1

ToOtherLens User

Connect:

1

y/n

ToOtherLens User

Connect:

1

y/n

ToOtherLens User

Connect:

1

y/n

Continued on next page

1 Push the key.Set

2 Move the key five times.

Set

4 Move the key.

Set

An underline appears below [Connect], and either {y} (YES) or {n} (NO) can now been selected.

No. : User

1 Name: ResetAll

1 The display is switched to the User screen.

The display is switched to the ToOtherLens screen.

Top initial screen

User screen

Screen A

An underline appears below [ToOtherLens].

ToOtherLens screen

5 Move the key, and select {y}.

6 Push the key.

The operating steps taken be- tween steps 1 to 10 (within the two dotted parallel lines) can be undone without copying the set- tings. To return to the original screen, move the up key. To turn off the display without copying the settings, push the DISPLAY switch.

Preparations prior to operation 1. Plug one end of the dedicated cable (20P-20P) into the zoom remote & focus remote connector (20-pin)

of the copy source lens and the other end into the corresponding connector of the copy destination lens. 2. Turn on the power of the copy source lens and copy destination lens. 3. Push the DISPLAY switch on the copy source lens to turn on the display. (Do not turn on the display of

the copy destination lens.)

E3-13

3.2 User Screen - Copying data between lenses

Set

An underline appears below [AllCopy], and either {y} (YES) or {n} (NO) can now been selected.

Screen B

y/n

Continued from Previous page

9 Move the key.

ToOtherLens User

ToAllUser Copy:

1

y/n

AllCopy screen

The display is switched to the AllCopy screen.

An underline appears below [Copy], and either {y} (YES) or {n} (NO) can now been selected.

Set11 Push the key.

10 Move the key, and select {y}.

Now Data Copy Please Wait...

The screen now shows the "Now Data Copy" message for a few moments before returning to Screen A. This completes the copying of the settings between the lenses.

ResetAll User

Copy ToOtherLens

1

Screen A

The display is switched to the Screen B.

7 Move the key twice.

ToOtherLens User

ToAllUser Copy:

1

y/n

ToOtherLens User

ToAllUser Copy:

1

y/n

2

1

8 Push the key.

ToOtherLens User

UserCopy : AllCopy :

1

y/n y/n

ToOtherLens User

UserCopy : AllCopy :

1

y/n

Set

SetMENU Set User 1 Set

Set

5

2

*1: If the Set key is pushed here, copying is actually com- menced. Bear in mind that once copying starts, it will not be possible to restore the data in the copy destination lens to the original data.

*2: Refrain from operating the op- eration switch or pushing the DISPLAY switch on either the copy source lens or copy des- tination lens while the settings are being copied. Otherwise, the copying operation may not be conducted properly.Note: If the settings were not copied successfully, an error message will appear.

For details on what remedial action to take, refer to (3) When an error dis- play has appeared on page E3-14.

M E

N U

S C

R E

E N

E3-14

3.2 User Screen - Copying data between lenses

(3) When an error display has appeared

If the settings were not copied successfully between the lenses, refer to the information in the table below.

Lens Connect Error!!

Has the dedicated cable (20P-20P) been connected?

Data cannot be copied between the lenses unless the dedicated cable (20P-20P) has been connected.

If, during copying, the cable was disconnected or the power of the copy destination lens dropped or it was turned off, the screen with the message shown on the left will be displayed. In a case like this, data copying has been stopped before it was completed and, as a result, the data is not copied properly.

Data cannot be copied between the lenses unless the power of both the copy source lens and copy destination lens has been turned on.

Has the power of the copy destination lens been turned on?

Have the power of both the copy source lens and copy destination lens been turned on?

Has the dedicated cable (20P-20P) been connected?

Turn on the power of both the copy source lens and copy destination lens, and go through the copying procedure again from the start.

Check that the power of both the copy source lens and copy destination lens have been turned on and the dedicated cable has been connected securely. Then push the DISPLAY sw and the display is switched to the Screen A, and go through the copying procedure again from the start.

Securely connect the dedicated cable (20P-20P) to the copy source lens and copy destination lens, and go through the copying procedure again from the start.

CheckpointError screen Cause of error Remedial action

Copy Error!!

User Copy ToOtherLens

1

Screen A

Access: Unlock

E3-15

3.2 User Screen - Lock mode settings (User 0 to 9)

The lock mode can be set for specific functions to ensure that the functions which have been locked will not be easily changed. It cannot be set differently for individual users, and once it has been set, it applies to all users. For details on the lock mode while the analog mode is established, refer to page E3-19 to E3-22.

(1) Lock operation

Continued on next page

[ I-Gain ] [Trk]OFF Shtl VTRA 1

FRM1A 2

V

RETR

[ ]MENU 1

2 Move the key six times.

No. : User

1 Name: ResetAll

1

Top initial screen

User screen

The last setting or default value is highlighted.

The display is switched to the User screen.

User Copy ToOtherLens

1

Access: Unlock Set3 Push the key.

Set1 Push the key.

Unlocked Locked

[ ] Lock [ I-Gain ] [Trk]OFF

Shtl VTRA 1

FRM1A 2

V

RETR

[ ]MENU 1 [ I-Gain ] [Trk]OFF

Shtl VTRA 1

FRM1A 2

V

RETR

MENU

Lock mode settings (User 0 to 9)

Concerning the password This model does not have a special password setting screen. The password which is established every time a lock operation is performed is the password which is needed to unlock the function. This means that you should make a note of each password. If you have forgotten the password, contact Canon or one of its distribu- tors. Anything from blanks to a maximum of 8 digits can be input as the password.

(NOTE)

While the lock mode is established, the following items can be set and the other items can no longer be set. Preset data(Shtl Shot position,Frame Preset position,preset speed) Zoom Track position and its ON/OFF setting Auto Iris Gain setting F-Hold setting Encoder output setting Adjustment of Camera Fol Voltage

(NOTE)

When a numeral from 0 to 9 is found in the User No. display area, it means that the function is unlocked. When the letters that spell "Lock" are found in the User No. display area, it means that the function is locked.

(NOTE)

M E

N U

S C

R E

E N

E3-16

3.2 User Screen - Lock mode settings (User 0 to 9)

Password Set

(D) Default value Space

Set Set Set6 DISPLAY

Max.8

Selection item

Can be input as the password.

Number of characters

(D) Default value

(D)Selection item Unlock Lock

(D) A B C D E F G H I J K L M N O P Q R S T U V W X Y Z a b c d e f g h i j k l m n o p q r s t u v w x y z 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9

Continued from Previous page

Set

Set

4 Input the password, and push the key. Password character input Use the up and down keys to search the characters, and the left and right keys to move from one digit to another or make corrections. Do NOT press the SET key until the password input is complete.

EnterPassword

EnterPassword

Lock OK? y/n

5 Move the key, and push the key.

6 The lock is now set.

User Copy

1

ToOtherLens Access: Lock

Concerning the password This model does not have a special password setting screen. The password which is established every time a lock operation is performed is the password which is needed to unlock the function. This means that you should make a note of each password. If you have forgotten the password, contact Canon or one of its distribu- tors. Anything from blanks to a maximum of 8 digits can be input as the password.

(NOTE)

E3-17

3.2 User Screen - Lock mode settings (User 0 to 9)

(2) Unlock operation There are two ways to perform this operation.

(Unlock operation 1)

or Password Set Set[ ] Lock

(D) Default value

(D)Selection item Unlock Lock

2 Push the key.

[ ] 1

Top initial screen

The display starts blinking.

1 Move the key.

MENU

MENU [ I-Gain ] [Trk]OFF

Shtl VTRA 1

FRM1A 2

V

RETR

[ ] Lock

MENU [ I-Gain ] [Trk]OFF

Shtl VTRA 1

FRM1A 2

V

RETR

Set

Set

EnterPassword

EnterPassword

Unlock OK? y/n

5 Move the key,and push the key.

6 The letters that spell "Lock" change to the User No.

3 Move the key, or key

Set4 Input the password, and press the key.

The same password which was input to lock the function serves as the password to unlock it.

(The User No. that was locked is displayed.)

[ I-Gain ] [Trk]OFF Shtl VTRA 1

FRM1A 2

V

RETR

MENU

[ I-Gain ] [Trk]OFF Shtl VTRA 1

FRM1A 2

V

RETR

[ ] Lock

[ ] Lock

M E

N U

S C

R E

E N

E3-18

3.2 User Screen - Lock mode settings (User 0 to 9)

[ I-Gain ] [Trk]OFF Shtl VTRA 1

FRM1A 2

V

RETR

MENU [ ] Lock

2 Move the key six times.

No. : User

1 Name: ResetAll

1

Top initial screen

User screen The display is switched to the User screen.

1 Push the key.Set

1

1

User Copy ToOtherLens Access: Lock

Set3 Push the key.

Set

Set

4 Input the password, and press the key.

The same password which was input to lock the function serves as the password to unlock it.

EnterPassword

EnterPassword

Unlock OK? y/n

5 Move the key,and push the key.

6 Unlock has now been set.

User Copy ToOtherLens Access: Unlock

(Unlock operation 2)

Password SetSet Set Set6 DISPLAY

E3-19

3.2 User Screen - Analog mode settings (User A)

User A (analog mode) This is selected when a conventional type of drive unit (with analog specifications) is to be operated. When the analog mode is established, the digital functions can no longer be used. The following applies to the drive units when this mode has been set.

The VTR, RET, IRIS A/M and IRIS INST switches perform the functions that correspond to the lettering inscribed on them. The rocker switch serves as a regular zooming switch.

The AUX1, AUX2 and MEMO switches cannot be used. The auto iris gain adjustment can be set by operating the display or the trimmer control. The shuttle shot, frame preset, speed preset and zoom track functions cannot be used.

The displays in the analog mode appear as shown below.

Unlocked Locked

[ ] A I G : 5 0 I G : 5 0 [ ] Lock

Two types of operations can be performed on the display: the auto iris gain can be adjusted, and the analog mode can be changed to another user. If the lock mode is established, it must be released (Unlock) before these opera- tions can be performed. The password used at the setting stage is required to release the lock mode.

Analog mode settings (User A) Top

M E

N U

S C

R E

E N

Concerning the password This model does not have a special password setting screen. The password which is established every time a lock operation is performed is the password which is needed to unlock the function. This means that you should make a note of each password. If you have forgotten the password, contact Canon or one of its distribu- tors. Anything from blanks to a maximum of 8 digits can be input as the password.

(NOTE)

E3-20

3.2 User Screen - Analog mode settings (User A)

(1) Setting the analog mode when not locking the settings

The display is switched to the User screen.

Top initial screen

User screen

2 Move the key.

[ I-Gain ] [Trk]OFF Shtl VTRA 1

FRM1A 2

V

RETR

[ ]MENU 1

3 Move the key or key, and select A.

An underline appears below [No.]. The last setting or default value is highlighted.

{Unlock} is highlighted.

[ ] A I G : 5 0

AnalogMode Lock / Unlock

1 Push the key.

4 Push the key.Set

5 Push the key.Set

6 The analog mode is established.

Set

No. : User

1 Name: ResetAll

1

No. : User

Name: ResetAll

1 1

No. : User

Name: ResetAll

A A

or SetMENU SetSet User 1

Settings can be stored on a user by user basis. Analog mode

Settings cannot be stored. The settings cannot be stored but they can be changed temporarily. The default values are restored by selecting the user or turning off the power of the lens.

Selection item

Setting storage

0 (D)1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 A

(D) Default value

E3-21

3.2 User Screen - Analog mode settings (User A)

(2) Setting the analog mode when locking the settings

The display is switched to the User screen.

Top initial screen

User screen

2 Move the key.

[ I-Gain ] [Trk]OFF Shtl VTRA 1

FRM1A 2

V

RETR

[ ]MENU 1

3 Move the key or key, and select A.

An underline appears below [No.]. The last setting or default value is highlighted.

EnterPassword

Set6 Input the password, and push the key. Password character input Use the up and down keys to search the characters, and the left and right keys to move from one digit to another or make corrections. Do NOT press the SET key until the password input is complete.

AnalogMode Lock / Unlock

Set5 Move the key, and push the key.

EnterPassword

Lock OK? y/n Continued on next page

1 Push the key.Set

4 Push the key.Set

{Unlock} is highlighted.

No. : User

1 Name: ResetAll

1

No. : User

Name: ResetAll

1 1

No. : User

Name: ResetAll

A A

M E

N U

S C

R E

E N

E3-22

3.2 User Screen - Analog mode settings (User A)

8 The lock is now set.

[ ] LockI G : 5 0

Set7 Move the key, and push the key.

Continued from Previous page

Password Set

(D) Default value Space

Set DISPLAY

Max.8

Selection item

Can be input as the password.

Number of characters

(D) Default value

(D)Selection item Unlock Lock

Settings can be stored on a user by user basis.

0 (D)1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 A

or SetMENU SetSet User 1

(D) A B C D E F G H I J K L M N O P Q R S T U V W X Y Z a b c d e f g h i j k l m n o p q r s t u v w x y z 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9

Settings cannot be stored. The settings cannot be stored but they can be changed temporarily. The default values are restored by selecting the user or turning off the power of the lens.

Selection item

Setting storage

Analog mode

Concerning the password This model does not have a special password setting screen. The password which is established every time a lock operation is performed is the password which is needed to unlock the function. This means that you should make a note of each password. If you have forgotten the password, contact Canon or one of its distribu- tors. Anything from blanks to a maximum of 8 digits can be input as the password.

(NOTE)

E3-23

3.2 User Screen - Analog mode operations (User A)

Unlocked Locked

[ ] A I G : 5 0 I G : 5 0 [ ] Lock

Two types of operations can be performed on the display: the auto iris gain can be adjusted, and the analog mode can be changed to another user. If the lock mode is established, it must be released (Unlock) before these operations can be performed. The password used at the setting stage is required to release the lock mode.

(1) Adjusting the auto iris gain

1 While the IG: area is highlighted, push the key.

The last setting or default is blinking.

Set

[ ] A

3 Push the key.Set

2 Move the key or key.

Move the left or right key until the number to be changed to appear.

The display which was blinking is now highlighted to indicate that the change has been entered.

Note: If the lock mode is established, {Lock} appeears on the display instead of {A}.

I G : 50

I G : 55

[ ] A

I G : 5 0

I G : 5 5

Analog screen

SetSet

01Selection item

Function

99

Minimum gain Maximum gain

I G : 5 0

Default value: This differs depending on the factory setting, but it is the setting established using the iris gain adjusting trimmer.

User A (analog mode) This is selected when a conventional type of drive unit (with analog specifications) is to be operated. When the analog mode is established, the digital functions can no longer be used. The following applies to the drive units when this mode has been set.

The VTR, RET, IRIS A/M and IRIS INST switches perform the functions that correspond to the lettering inscribed on them. The rocker switch serves as a regular zooming switch.

The AUX1, AUX2 and MEMO switches cannot be used. The auto iris gain adjustment can be set by operating the display or the trimmer control. The shuttle shot, frame preset, speed preset and zoom track functions cannot be used.

The displays in the analog mode appear as shown below.

Analog mode operations (User A) Top

M E

N U

S C

R E

E N

E3-24

3.2 User Screen - Analog mode operations (User A)

(2) Changing the user The procedure for changing from the analog mode to another user depends on the lock mode setting status.

1 Move the key, and push the key.

The display starts blinking.

Set

[ ] A I G : 5 0

[ ] A I G : 5 0

3 Push the key.Set

2 Move the key or key.

Move the left or right key until the number to be changed to appear.

The display which was blinking is now highlighted to indicate that the change has been entered.

[ I-Gain ] [Trk]OFF Shtl VTRA 1

FRM1A 2

V

RETR

[ ]MENU 0

[ I-Gain ] [Trk]OFF Shtl VTRA 1

FRM1A 2

V

RETR

[ ]MENU 0

I :

(Unlocked)

SetSet or I G : 5 0

E3-25

3.2 User Screen - Analog mode operations (User A)

1 Move the key, and push the key.

The display starts blinking.

Set

[ ] Lock I G : 5 0

[ ] Lock I G : 5 0

2 Move the key or key.

I :

EnterPassword

Set3 Input the password, and push the key. Password character input Use the up and down keys to search the characters, and the left and right keys to move from one digit to another or make corrections. Do NOT press the SET key until the password input is complete.

Set4 Move the key, and push the key.

Set

Set

5 Push the key.

EnterPassword

Unlock OK? y/n

[ ] A I G : 5 0

[ ] A I G : 5 0 The display starts blinking.

The display which was blinking is now highlighted to indicate that the change has been entered.

6 Move the key or key, and push the key.

[ I-Gain ] [Trk]OFF Shtl VTRA 1

FRM1A 2

V

RETR

[ ]MENU 1

(Locked)

PasswordorSet Set Set Set

Set

(D) Default value

Max.8

Selection item

Can be input as the password.

Number of characters

I G : 5 0

or

(D) A B C D E F G H I J K L M N O P Q R S T U V W X Y Z a b c d e f g h i j k l m n o p q r s t u v w x y z 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9

M E

N U

S C

R E

E N

1 Hold down the DISPLAY switch and key for more than 2 seconds. The following message is displayed depending on the user who was using the system prior to the jump operation.

User 0 : User 0 Reset Now User 1 to 9 : Escape To User 0

Set

2 The Top initial screen is displayed.

User 0 Reset Now

With User 0

Escape To User 0

With User 1 to 9

Any screen

Top initial screen or

[ I-Gain ] [Trk]OFF Shtl VTRA 1

FRM1A 2

V

RETR

[ ]MENU 1

[ I-Gain ] [Trk]OFF Shtl VTRA 1

FRM1A 2

V

RETR

[ ]MENU 0

2 secSetandDISPLAY[ ]

When the power is turned on again: The same user who was using the system prior to the jump operation is selected. However, if the user was changed after the jump operation was performed, the user using the system after the change was made is selected instead.

This operation makes it possible to jump instantly to the User 0 setting status (factory setting status) from the current setting status whether for any user (User 0 to 9) or User A.

(1) For User 0 to 9

(2) For User A (Analog mode)

1 Hold down the DISPLAY switch and key for more than 2 seconds.Set

2 The Top initial screen is displayed.

Escape To User 0

Analog mode

Top initial screen

[ I-Gain ] [Trk]OFF Shtl VTRA 1

FRM1A 2

V

RETR

[ ]MENU 0

[ ] A I G : 5 0

3.2 User Screen - Escape operation

E3-26

Escape operation

Even when the jump operation is performed, the settings of the following items will remain the same as before the jump operation: auto iris gain value, remote iris gain value, F-Hold setting, encoder output setting, Initialize operation setting and Adjustment of Camera Fol Voltage.

(NOTE)

The jump operation cannot be performed in the lock status.

(NOTE)

E3-27

Page

Allocating a function to the AUX1 switch .......................................................................................E3-28

Allocating a function to the AUX2 switch .......................................................................................E3-29

Allocating a function to the VTR switch .........................................................................................E3-30

Allocating a function to the RET switch .........................................................................................E3-31

Setting the iris A/M switch .............................................................................................................E3-32

Allocating a function to the seesaw switch ....................................................................................E3-33

Top denotes an item whose setting can be changed also on the Top screen.

Top

Top

Top

Top

Top

Top

3.3 Switch Screen

3.3 Switch Screen

M E

N U

S C

R E

E N

E3-28

3.3 Switch Screen - Allocating a function to the AUX1 switch

or

(D) Default value

Shtl(D) Selection item

Function

NON VTR RET FRM1 FRM2 Sped

Shuttle-Shot button No function VTR switch RET switch Framing Preset1

switch Framing Preset2

switch Speed Preset

switch

MENU Set Switch 1

The display is switched to the Switch screen.

2 Move the key.

3 Move the key or key.

[ I-Gain ] [Trk]OFF Shtl VTRA 1

FRM1A 2

V

RETR

[ ]MENU 1

1 Push the key, and then move the key.Set

An underline appears below [AUX1]. The function set last or default function is highlighted.

Move the left or right key until the function to be changed to appears.

Switch screen

Top initial screen

Switch 1

VTR:V VTR

AUX1:A 1

AUX2:A 2 FRM1 Shtl

Switch 1

VTR:V VTR

AUX1:A 1

AUX2:A 2 FRM1 VTR

Switch 1

VTR:V

A 1

AUX2:A 2

VTR

AUX1: FRM1 Shtl

A function can be allocated to the AUX1 switch.

Allocating a function to the AUX1 switch Top

Prior to operation, select the user for whom the settings will be made. (For details on how to select the user, refer to page E2-5 or E3-4.)

IMPORTANT

E3-29

3.3 Switch Screen - Allocating a function to the AUX2 switch

[ I-Gain ] [Trk]OFF Shtl VTRA 1

FRM1A 2

V

RETR

[ ]MENU 1

The display is switched to the Switch screen.

2 Move the key twice.

3 Move the key or key.

1 Push the key, and then move the key.Set

An underline appears below [AUX2]. The function set last or default function is highlighted.

Move the left or right key until the function to be changed to appears.

Switch screen

Top initial screen

Switch 1

VTR:V

A 1

AUX2:A 2

VTR

AUX1: FRM1 Shtl

Switch 1

VTR:V VTR

AUX1:A 1

AUX2:A 2

Shtl FRM1

Switch 1

VTR:V VTR

AUX1:A 1

AUX2:A 2

Shtl Sped

(D) Default value

Shtl(D) Selection item

Function

NON VTR RETFRM1 FRM2 Sped

Shuttle-Shot button No function VTR switch RET switchFraming Preset1

switch Framing Preset2

switch Speed Preset

switch

2 orMENU Set Switch 1

A function can be allocated to the AUX2 switch.

Allocating a function to the AUX2 switch Top

M E

N U

S C

R E

E N

Prior to operation, select the user for whom the settings will be made. (For details on how to select the user, refer to page E2-5 or E3-4.)

IMPORTANT

E3-30

3.3 Switch Screen - Allocating a function to the VTR switch

[ I-Gain ] [Trk]OFF Shtl VTRA 1

FRM1A 2

V

RETR

[ ]MENU 1

Switch 1

RET:R RET

AUX2:A 2

VTR:V

FRM1 VTR

Switch 1

RET:R RET

AUX2:A 2

VTR:V

FRM1 RET

The display is switched to the Switch screen.

2 Move the key three times.

3 Move the key or key.

1 Push the key, and then move the key.Set

An underline appears below [VTR]. The function set last or default function is highlighted.

Move the left or right key until the function to be changed to appears.

Switch screen

Top initial screen

Switch 1

VTR:V

A 1

AUX2:A 2

VTR

AUX1: FRM1 Shtl

3 orMENU Set Switch 1

(D) Default value

(D) ShtlSelection item VTR

Function

RET FRM1 FRM2 Sped

Shuttle-Shot buttonVTR switch RET switch Framing Preset1

switch Framing Preset2

switch Speed Preset

switch

A function can be allocated to the VTR switch.

Allocating a function to the VTR switch Top

Prior to operation, select the user for whom the settings will be made. (For details on how to select the user, refer to page E2-5 or E3-4.)

IMPORTANT

E3-31

3.3 Switch Screen - Allocating a function to the RET switch

[ I-Gain ] [Trk]OFF Shtl VTRA 1

FRM1A 2

V

RETR

[ ]MENU 1

The display is switched to the Switch screen.

2 Move the key four times.

3 Move the key or key.

1 Push the key, and then move the key.Set

An underline appears below [RET]. The function set last or default function is highlighted.

Move the left or right key until the function to be changed to appears.

Switch screen

Top initial screen

Switch 1

A/M:AM Normal

VTR:V

RET:R

VTR RET

Switch 1

A/M:AM Normal

VTR:V

RET:R

VTR Sped

Switch 1

VTR:V

A 1

AUX2:A 2

VTR

AUX1: FRM1 Shtl

4 orMENU Set Switch 1

(D) Default value

(D) Shtl VTRRET FRM1 FRM2 Sped

Shuttle-Shot button VTR switchRET switch

Selection item

Function Framing Preset1 switch

Framing Preset2 switch

Speed Preset switch

A function can be allocated to the RET switch.

Allocating a function to the RET switch Top

M E

N U

S C

R E

E N

Prior to operation, select the user for whom the settings will be made. (For details on how to select the user, refer to page E2-5 or E3-4.)

IMPORTANT

E3-32

3.3 Switch Screen - Setting the iris A/M switch

[ I-Gain ] [Trk]OFF Shtl VTRA 1

FRM1A 2

V

RETR

[ ]MENU 1

Switch 1

SSaw: A/M:AM

RET:R RET

Zoom Normal

Switch 1

SSaw: A/M:AM

RET:R RET

Zoom Revers

The display is switched to the Switch screen.

2 Move the key five times.

3 Move the key or key.

1 Push the key, and then move the key.Set

An underline appears below [A/M]. The function set last or default function is highlighted.

Move the left or right key until the function to be changed to appears.

Switch screen

Top initial screen

Switch 1

VTR:V

A 1

AUX2:A 2

VTR

AUX1: FRM1 Shtl

5 orMENU Set Switch 1

(D) Default value

(D)NormalSelection item

Function

Revers

Normal operation A Auto / M Manual A Manual / M Auto A Auto / M Auto A Manual / M Manual

Reverse operation

Auto Manual

Auto Only Manual Only

A function can be allocated to the iris A/M switch.

Setting the iris A/M switch Top

Prior to operation, select the user for whom the settings will be made. (For details on how to select the user, refer to page E2-5 or E3-4.)

IMPORTANT

E3-33

3.3 Switch Screen - Allocating a function to the seesaw switch

[ I-Gain ] [Trk]OFF Shtl VTRA 1

FRM1A 2

V

RETR

[ ]MENU 1

Switch 1

SSaw: A/M:AM

RET:R RET Normal

Zoom

Switch 1

SSaw: A/M:AM

RET:R RET Normal

Iris

The display is switched to the Switch screen.

2 Move the key six times.

3 Move the key or key.

1 Push the key, and then move the key.Set

An underline appears below [SSaw]. The function set last or default function is highlighted.

Move the left or right key until the function to be changed to appears.

Switch screen

Top initial screen

Switch 1

VTR:V

A 1

AUX2:A 2

VTR

AUX1: FRM1 Shtl

6MENU Set Switch 1

(D)

(D)Zoom Iris

Zoom Iris

The {Zoom} or {Iris} operation function can be allocated to the zoom seesaw switch.

Precautions when the iris function has been allocated Note 1: Zoom operations cannot be performed using the seesaw switch. Note 2: Before the iris is to be operated using the rocker switch, the iris mode must be set to MANUAL. The

iris cannot be operated in the AUTO or REMOTE mode. Note 3: When the TELE side is pushed down, the iris operation is set to the OPEN side; conversely, when the

WIDE side is pushed down, it is set to the CLOSE side. Note 4: The zoom speed adjustment function takes effect, and the maximum iris speed can be changed. (See

page E3-59)

Allocating a function to the seesaw switch Top

M E

N U

S C

R E

E N

Prior to operation, select the user for whom the settings will be made. (For details on how to select the user, refer to page E2-5 or E3-4.)

IMPORTANT

E3-35

Page

Setting the Frame Preset1 preset speed ......................................................................................E3-36

Setting the Frame Preset1 zoom to ON or OFF ............................................................................E3-37

Setting the Frame Preset1 focus to ON or OFF (A type lens only) .............................................E3-38

Setting the Frame Preset2 preset speed ......................................................................................E3-39

Setting the Frame Preset2 zoom to ON or OFF ............................................................................E3-40

Setting the Frame Preset2 focus to ON or OFF (A type lens only) .............................................E3-41

Setting the zoom speed in the preset mode .........................................................................................E3-42

Setting the zoom start characteristics for preset operations ................................................................E3-43

Setting the zoom stop characteristics for preset operations .................................................................E3-44

Top denotes an item whose setting can be changed also on the Top screen.

Top

Top

Top

Top

Top

Top

3.4 Preset Screen

3.4 Preset Screen

M E

N U

S C

R E

E N

E3-36

3.4 Preset Screen - Setting the Frame Preset1 preset speed

The display is switched to the Preset screen.

2 Move the key.

3 Push the key.

4 Move the key or key.

5 Push the key.

[ I-Gain ] [Trk]OFF Shtl VTRA 1

FRM1A 2

V

RETR

[ ]MENU 1

Top initial screen

Preset screen

Screen A

Screen A

Frame1 screen

An underline appears below [Frame1].

Move the left or right key to select {PRE} or {FAST}.

1 Push the key, and move the key twice.Set

Set

Set

The display is switched to the Frame1 screen. The last setting or default value is highlighted.

Frame1: Preset

PRE Frame2: PRE ZSpeed: 800

Frame1: Preset

FAST Frame2: PRE ZSpeed: 800

Frame1: Preset

PRE

Focus: OFF Zoom: ON

The display returns to Screen A.

Frame1: Preset

FAST

Focus: OFF Zoom: ON

This item does not appear with the "R" type lens.

Frame1: Preset

PRE Frame2: PRE ZSpeed: 800

(D) Default value

(D)PRESelection item

Function

FAST

Operation at the preset speed

Operation at the maximum speed

Set Set2 Preset orMENU Set

Whether to use the preset speed or maximum speed to move to the memory position can be selected. (Bear in mind that the display is switched to another screen when this speed is set.)

Note: When {PRE} is selected, set the speed. (See page E3-42)

Setting the Frame Preset1 preset speed Top

Prior to operation, select the user for whom the settings will be made. (For details on how to select the user, refer to page E2-5 or E3-4.)

IMPORTANT

E3-37

3.4 Preset Screen - Setting the Frame Preset1 zoom to ON or OFF

2 Move the key.

3 Push the key, and move the key.

[ I-Gain ] [Trk]OFF Shtl VTRA 1

FRM1A 2

V

RETR

[ ]MENU 1

Frame1: PRE

Focus: OFF Zoom: ON

Preset

Frame1: PRE

Focus: OFF Zoom: OFF

Preset

1 Push the key, and move the key twice.Set

Set

Frame1: Preset

PRE Frame2: PRE ZSpeed: 800

Frame1: Preset

FAST Frame2: PRE ZSpeed: 800

Frame1: Preset

PRE Frame2: PRE ZSpeed: 800

The display is switched to the Preset screen.

4 Move the key or key.

5 Push the key.

Top initial screen

Preset screen

Screen A

Screen A

Frame1 screen

An underline appears below [Frame1].

Move the left or right key to select {ON} or {OFF}.

Set

The display is switched to the Frame1 screen. An underline appears below [Zoom], and the last setting or default value is highlighted.

The display returns to Screen A.

This item does not appear with the "R" type lens.

(D) Default value

(D)Selection item

Function

Set Set2 Preset orMENU Set

ON OFF

Zoom operations enabled Zoom operations disabled

The zoom operations up to the memory position can be enabled or disabled. (Bear in mind that the display is switched to another screen when the setting is performed.)

Setting the Frame Preset1 zoom to ON or OFF Top

M E

N U

S C

R E

E N

Prior to operation, select the user for whom the settings will be made. (For details on how to select the user, refer to page E2-5 or E3-4.)

IMPORTANT

E3-38

3.4 Preset Screen - Setting the Frame Preset1 focus to ON or OFF (A type lens only)

[ I-Gain ] [Trk]OFF Shtl VTRA 1

FRM1A 2

V

RETR

[ ]MENU 1

Frame1: Preset

PRE Frame2: PRE ZSpeed: 800

Frame1: Preset

FAST Frame2: PRE ZSpeed: 800

Frame1: Preset

PRE

Focus: OFF Zoom: ON

Frame1: Preset

PRE

Focus: ON Zoom: ON

Frame1: Preset

PRE Frame2: PRE ZSpeed: 800

2 Move the key.

3 Push the key, and move the key twice.

1 Push the key, and move the key twice.Set

Set

The display is switched to the Preset screen.

4 Move the key or key.

5 Push the key.

Top initial screen

Preset screen

Screen A

Screen A

Frame1 screen

An underline appears below [Frame1].

Move the left or right key to select {ON} or {OFF}.

Set

The display is switched to the Frame1 screen. An underline appears below [Focus], and the last setting or default value is highlighted.

The display returns to Screen A.

(D) Default value

(D)Selection item

Function

Set Set2 2Preset orMENU Set

OFF ON

Focus operations disabled Focus operations enabled

The focus operations up to the memory position can be enabled or disabled. (Bear in mind that the display is switched to another screen when this setting is performed.)

Note: This item can be selected with the A type lens only. There is no [Focus] display with the R type lens.

Setting the Frame Preset1 focus to ON or OFF (A type lens only) Top

Prior to operation, select the user for whom the settings will be made. (For details on how to select the user, refer to page E2-5 or E3-4.)

IMPORTANT

E3-39

3.4 Preset Screen - Setting the Frame Preset2 preset speed

[ ]

The display is switched to the Preset screen.

2 Move the key twice.

3 Push the key.

4 Move the key or key.

5 Push the key.

[ I-Gain ] [Trk]OFF Shtl VTRA 1

FRM1A 2

V

RETR

[ ]MENU 1

Top initial screen

Preset screen

Screen A

Screen A

Frame2 screen

An underline appears below [Frame2].

Move the left or right key to select {PRE} or {FAST}.

Frame1: Preset

PRE Frame2: ZSpeed: 800

PRE

Frame1: Preset

PRE Frame2: ZSpeed: 800

FAST

1 Push the key, and move the key twice.Set

Set

Set

The display is switched to the Frame2 screen. The last setting or default value is highlighted.

Frame2: Preset

PRE

Focus: OFF Zoom: ON

The display returns to Screen A.

Frame2: Preset

FAST

Focus: OFF Zoom: ON

Frame1: Preset

PRE Frame2: PRE ZSpeed: 800

This item does not appear with the "R" type lens.

(D) Default value

(D)PRESelection item

Function

FAST

Operation at the preset speed

Operation at the maximum speed

Set Set2 2Preset orMENU Set

Whether to use the preset speed or maximum speed to move to the memory position can be selected. (Bear in mind that the display is switched to another screen when this speed is set.)

Note: When {PRE} is selected, set the speed. (See page E3-42)

Setting the Frame Preset2 preset speed Top

M E

N U

S C

R E

E N

Prior to operation, select the user for whom the settings will be made. (For details on how to select the user, refer to page E2-5 or E3-4.)

IMPORTANT

E3-40

3.4 Preset Screen - Setting the Frame Preset2 zoom to ON or OFF

Setting the Frame Preset2 zoom to ON or OFF

2 Move the key twice.

3 Push the key, and move the key.

[ I-Gain ] [Trk]OFF Shtl VTRA 1

FRM1A 2

V

RETR

[ ]MENU 1

Frame2: PRE

Focus: OFF Zoom: ON

Preset

Frame2: PRE

Focus: OFF Zoom: OFF

Preset

1 Push the key, and move the key twice.Set

Set

Frame1: Preset

PRE Frame2: PRE ZSpeed: 800

The display is switched to the Preset screen.

4 Move the key or key.

5 Push the key.

Top initial screen

Preset screen

Screen A

Screen A

Frame2 screen

An underline appears below [Frame2].

Move the left or right key to select {ON} or {OFF}.

Set

The display is switched to the Frame2 screen. An underline appears below [Zoom], and the last setting or default value is highlighted.

The display returns to Screen A.

Frame1: Preset

PRE Frame2: ZSpeed: 800

PRE

Frame1: Preset

PRE Frame2: ZSpeed: 800

PRE

This item does not appear with the "R" type lens.

(D) Default value

(D)Selection item

Function

Set Set2 2Preset orMENU Set

ON OFF

Zoom operations enabled Zoom operations disabled

The zoom operations up to the memory position can be enabled or disabled. (Bear in mind that the display is switched to another screen when the setting is performed.)

Top

Prior to operation, select the user for whom the settings will be made. (For details on how to select the user, refer to page E2-5 or E3-4.)

IMPORTANT

E3-41

3.4 Preset Screen - Setting the Frame Preset2 focus to ON or OFF (A type lens only)

[ I-Gain ] [Trk]OFF Shtl VTRA 1

FRM1A 2

V

RETR

[ ]MENU 1

Frame2: Preset

PRE

Focus: OFF Zoom: ON

Frame2: Preset

PRE

Focus: ON Zoom: ON

Frame1: Preset

PRE Frame2: PRE ZSpeed: 800

2 Move the key twice.

3 Push the key, and move the key twice.

1 Push the key, and move the key twice.Set

Set

The display is switched to the Preset screen.

4 Move the key or key.

5 Push the key.

Top initial screen

Preset screen

Screen A

Screen A

Frame2 screen

An underline appears below [Frame2].

Move the left or right key to select {ON} or {OFF}.

Set

The display is switched to the Frame2 screen. An underline appears below [Focus], and the last setting or default value is highlighted.

The display returns to Screen A.

Frame1: Preset

PRE Frame2: ZSpeed: 800

PRE

Frame1: Preset

PRE Frame2: ZSpeed: 800

PRE

(D) Default value

(D)Selection item

Function

Set Set2 2 2Preset orMENU Set

OFF ON

Focus operations disabled Focus operations enabled

The focus operations up to the memory position can be enabled or disabled. (Bear in mind that the display is switched to another screen when this setting is performed.)

Note: This item can be selected with the A type lens only. There is no [Focus] display with the R type lens.

Setting the Frame Preset2 focus to ON or OFF (A type lens only) Top

M E

N U

S C

R E

E N

Prior to operation, select the user for whom the settings will be made. (For details on how to select the user, refer to page E2-5 or E3-4.)

IMPORTANT

E3-42

3.4 Preset Screen - Setting the zoom speed in the preset mode

2 Move the key three times.

3 Move the key or key.

[ I-Gain ] [Trk]OFF Shtl VTRA 1

FRM1A 2

V

RETR

[ ]MENU 1

1 Push the key, and move the key twice.Set

Frame2: Preset

PRE ZSpeed: ZMovement

800

Frame2: Preset

PRE ZSpeed: ZMovement

500

Frame1: Preset

PRE Frame2: PRE ZSpeed: 800

The display is switched to the Preset screen.

Top initial screen

Preset screen

An underline appears below [ZSpeed]. The last setting or default value is highlighted.

Move the left or right key until the number to be changed to appears.

(D) Default value

(D)

2 3Preset orMENU Set

001Selection item

Function

800

Minimum speed Maximum speed

The zoom speed from any position up to the memory position can be set. There are two ways to change the speed setting: one involves using the Memo button (refer to the Lens Manual), and the other is through dis- play operations. Either way can be used, but the setting established last takes precedence.

Note: The same setting value applies to both Frame1 and Frame2.

Setting the zoom speed in the preset mode

Prior to operation, select the user for whom the settings will be made. (For details on how to select the user, refer to page E2-5 or E3-4.)

IMPORTANT

E3-43

3.4 Preset Screen - Setting the zoom start characteristics for preset operations

Setting the zoom start characteristics for preset operations

2 Move the key four times.

3 Push the key.

4 Move the key.

6 Push the key.

[ I-Gain ] [Trk]OFF Shtl VTRA 1

FRM1A 2

V

RETR

[ ]MENU 1

Frame2: Preset

PRE ZSpeed: ZMovement

800

Preset ZMovement

Stop: Start: 99

91

Preset ZMovement

Stop: Start: D99

91

Preset ZMovement

Stop: Start: 50

91

5 Move the key or key.

Move the left or right key until the number to be changed to appears.

1 Push the key, and move the key twice.Set

Set

An underline appears below [Start], and the last setting or default value is highlighted.

Set

Frame1: Preset

PRE Frame2: PRE ZSpeed: 800

The display is switched to the Preset screen.

Top initial screen

Preset screen

Screen A

ZMovement screen

An underline appears below [ZMovement].

The display is switched to the ZMovement screen.

The display returns to Screen A.

(D) Default value

(D)

2 4Preset orMENU Set Set Set

00Selection item

Function

99

Slow start Quick start

The zoom start characteristics used when preset operations have been performed can be set.

M E

N U

S C

R E

E N

Prior to operation, select the user for whom the settings will be made. (For details on how to select the user, refer to page E2-5 or E3-4.)

IMPORTANT

E3-44

[ I-Gain ] [Trk]OFF Shtl VTRA 1

FRM1A 2

V

RETR

[ ]MENU 1

Frame2: Preset

PRE ZSpeed: ZMovement

800

Preset ZMovement

Stop: Start: 99

91

Frame1: Preset

PRE Frame2: PRE ZSpeed: 800

Preset ZMovement

Stop: Start: 99

D91

Preset ZMovement

Stop: Start: 99

70

2 Move the key four times.

3 Push the key.

4 Move the key twice.

6 Push the key.

5 Move the key or key.

Move the left or right key until the number to be changed to appears.

1 Push the key, and move the key twice.Set

Set

An underline appears below [Stop], and the last setting or default value is highlighted.

Set

The display is switched to the Preset screen.

Top initial screen

Preset screen

Screen A

ZMovement screen

An underline appears below [ZMovement].

The display is switched to the ZMovement screen.

The display returns to Screen A.

Default value 91

2 24Preset orMENU Set Set Set

00Selection item

Function

99

Slow stop Quick stop

The zoom stop characteristics used when preset operations have been performed can be set.

Setting the zoom stop characteristics for preset operations

3.4 Preset Screen - Setting the zoom stop characteristics for preset operations

Prior to operation, select the user for whom the settings will be made. (For details on how to select the user, refer to page E2-5 or E3-4.)

IMPORTANT

E3-45

Page

Iris gain setting

(1) Auto iris gain setting .................................................................................................................E3-46

(2) Remote iris gain setting ...............................................................................................................E3-47

Setting the iris torque ....................................................................................................................E3-48

Setting the iris correction to ON or OFF ...............................................................................................E3-49

Setting the iris close detection to ON or OFF .......................................................................................E3-50

Top denotes an item whose setting can be changed also on the Top screen.

Top

Top

Top

3.5 Iris Screen

3.5 Iris Screen

M E

N U

S C

R E

E N

E3-46

3.5 Iris Screen - Iris gain setting

The auto iris gain has already been set to the appropriate level at the factory but it can be changed if so desired. There are two ways to change its setting: one involves using the auto iris gain adjusting trimmer (refer to the Lens Manual), and the other is through display operations. The setting established last takes precedence.

The same auto iris gain setting is used for all the users regardless of the user who is indicated on the display. For this reason, there is no need to select the user before performing the setting. As an exception to the general rule, any change made in the setting is reected for user 0 as well.

(1) Auto iris gain setting

The display is switched to the Iris screen.

Top initial screen

Iris screen

[I-Gain] screen

6 Push the key.

[ I-Gain ] [Trk]OFF Shtl VTRA 1

FRM1A 2

V

RETR

[ ]MENU 1

1 Push the key, and move the key three times.

4 Move the key.

Set

3 Push the key.

Set

Set

The display returns to Screen A.

[ I-Gain ] Iris

Remote: 90 Auto: 52

[ ]

[ I-Gain ] Iris

Remote: 90 Auto: 55

[ ]

5 Move the key or key.

An underline appears below [Auto]. The function set last or default value is highlighted.

Move the left or right key until the value to be changed to appears.

The display is switched to the [I-Gain] screen.

2 Move the key.

An underline appears below [I-Gain].

Iris [ ] [ I-Gain ] Torque: High Comp: ON

[ I-Gain ] Iris

Remote: 90 Auto: 52

[ ]

Screen A

[ I-Gain ] Iris

Comp: ON Torque: High

[ ]

orSet Set2 3 SetMENU

Default value: This differs depending on the factory setting, but it is the setting established using the iris gain adjusting trimmer.

01Selection item

Function

99

Minimum gain Maximum gain

Iris [ ]

Note: When adjusting the gain while checking the iris op- eration

-> Check that the A/M switch on the drive unit is set to the [AUTO] mode.

-> Set the camera s iris mode to [AUTO].

Note: Find the iris ring on the lens body, and set it to the posi- tion where the maximum gain is achieved without causing hunting.

Note: The iris gain setting will not be reset even when the "Resetting" procedure described on page E3-6 is initiated. Since the user can no longer refer to the factory setting once this setting has been changed, it is recom- mended that the factory setting be noted down if it will be required.

Iris gain setting Top

E3-47

3.5 Iris Screen - Remote iris gain setting

The display is switched to the Iris screen.

Top initial screen

Iris screen

[I-Gain] screen

6 Push the key.

[ I-Gain ] [Trk]OFF Shtl VTRA 1

FRM1A 2

V

RETR

[ ]MENU 1

1 Push the key, and move the key three times.

4 Move the key twice.

Set

3 Push the key.

Set

Set

The display returns to Screen A.

52

5 Move the key or key.

[ I-Gain ] Iris

Remote: 90 Auto:

[ ]

[ I-Gain ] Iris

Remote: 93 Auto: 52

[ ]

An underline appears below [Remote]. The function set last or default value is highlighted.

Move the left or right key until the value to be changed to appears.

The display is switched to the [I-Gain] screen.

2 Move the key.

An underline appears below [I-Gain].

Iris [ ] [ I-Gain ] Torque: High Comp: ON

[ I-Gain ] Iris

Remote: 90 Auto: 52

[ ]

Screen A

[ I-Gain ] Iris

Comp: ON Torque: High

[ ]

orSet Set2 3 2 SetMENU

Default value 90

01Selection item

Function

99

Minimum gain Maximum gain

Iris [ ]

(2) Remote iris gain setting

The remote iris gain has already been set to the appropriate level at the factory but it can be changed if so desired.

The same remote iris gain setting is used for all the users regardless of the user who is indicated on the display. For this reason, there is no need to select the user before performing the setting. As an exception to the general rule, any change made in the setting is reected for user 0 as well.

Note: When adjusting the gain while checking the iris operation

-> Check that the A/M switch on the drive unit is set to the [AUTO] mode.

-> Set the camera's iris mode to [Remote].

Note: The iris gain setting will not be reset even when the "Reset- ting" procedure described on page E3-6 is initiated. Since the user can no longer refer to the factory setting once this setting has been changed, it is recommended that the factory setting be noted down if it will be required.

M E

N U

S C

R E

E N

E3-48

3.5 Iris Screen - Setting the iris torque

The display is switched to the Iris screen.

Top initial screen

Iris screen

[ I-Gain ] [Trk]OFF A 1

A 2

V

[ ]MENU 1

Shtl VTR FRM1 RETR

1 Push the key, and move the key three times.

3 Move the key or key.

Set

2 Move the key twice.

Move the left or right key to select {High} or {Low}.

An underline appears below [Torque]. The function set last or default function is highlighted.

[ I-Gain ] Iris [ ]

Torque: Comp: ON

High

[ I-Gain ] Iris [ ]

Torque: Comp: ON

Low

Iris [ ] [ I-Gain ] Torque: High Comp: ON

HighSelection item

Function

Low

High operating force Low operating force

Set 2 3 2

(D) Default value

(D)

orMENU Iris [ ]

The amount of force used to manually operate the iris ring can be selected.

Setting the iris torque Top

Prior to operation, select the user for whom the settings will be made. (For details on how to select the user, refer to page E2-5 or E3-4.)

IMPORTANT

E3-49

3.5 Iris Screen - Setting the iris correction to ON or OFF

Setting the iris correction to ON or OFF

The display is switched to the Iris screen.

Top initial screen

Iris screen

[ -Gain ] [Trk]OFF A 1

A 2

V

[ ]MENU 1

Shtl VTR FRM1 RETR

This appears when ON is selected as the [Comp] setting.

1 Push the key, and move the key three times.

3 Move the key or key.

Set

2 Move the key three times.

An underline appears below [Comp]. The function set last or default function is highlighted.

Move the left or right key to select {ON} or {OFF}.

Iris [ ] [ I-Gain ] Torque: High Comp: ON

Iris [ ]

Comp: Close: OFF

Torque: High ON

Iris [ ]

Comp: Torque: High

OFF

ONSelection item

Function

OFF

Iris correction No iris correction

Set 2 3 3

(D) Default value

(D)

orMENU Iris [ ]

The light quantity drops when the extender (2.0x) is used. To compensate for this, a function for correcting the iris by opening it by an amount equivalent to 2F can be set.

Note: The iris may not close completely when the iris correction function is set to ON and the extender (2.0x) is used. If this is the case, follow the procedure for Setting the iris close detection to ON or OFF, and set the detection to ON.

M E

N U

S C

R E

E N

Prior to operation, select the user for whom the settings will be made. (For details on how to select the user, refer to page E2-5 or E3-4.)

IMPORTANT

E3-50

The display is switched to the Iris screen.

Top initial screen

Iris screen

[ I-Gain ] [Trk]OFF Shtl VTRA 1

FRM1A 2

V

RETR

[ ]MENU 1

This appears when ON is selected as the [Comp] setting.

1 Push the key, and move the key three times.

3 Move the key or key.

Set

2 Move the key four times.

An underline appears below [Close]. The function set last or default function is highlighted.

Move the left or right key to select {ON} or {OFF}.

Iris [ ] [ I-Gain ] Torque: High Comp: ON

Iris [ ]

Comp: Torque: High

ON Close: OFF

Iris [ ]

Comp: Close:

Torque: High ON ON

OFFSelection item

Function

ON

No iris close detection Iris close detection

Set 2 3 4

(D) Default value

(D)

orMENU Iris [ ]

This iris cannot be closed when the extender (2.0x) is inserted while the iris correction function is set to ON. To compensate for this, a function which closes the iris when iris close has been detected can be set.

Note: Iris close detection takes effect when the iris correction function is set to ON.

Note: Depending on the camera, it may not be possible for the iris to operate properly due to the interaction between the iris correction func- tion of the lens and the iris control exercised from the camera. At such a time, set the iris close detection to OFF.

3.5 Iris Screen - Setting the iris close detection to ON or OFF

Setting the iris close detection to ON or OFF

Prior to operation, select the user for whom the settings will be made. (For details on how to select the user, refer to page E2-5 or E3-4.)

IMPORTANT

E3-51

Page

Setting the zoom track to ON or OFF ...............................................................................................E3-52

Setting F-Hold to ON or OFF ................................................................................................................E3-53

Setting the zoom servo start characteristics .........................................................................................E3-54

Setting the zoom servo stop characteristics .........................................................................................E3-55

Setting the zoom mechanism end stop characteristics ........................................................................E3-56

Setting the curve characteristics of the seesaw switch .....................................................................E3-57

Setting the analog demand curve characteristics ............................................................................E3-58

Setting the maximum value of the zoom speed control ........................................................................E3-59

Setting the minimum value of the zoom speed control .........................................................................E3-60

Setting the servo type from the zoom demand .....................................................................................E3-61

Setting the zoom speed control to ON or OFF for the zoom demand ..................................................E3-62

Setting the zoom demand specifications ..............................................................................................E3-63

Top denotes an item whose setting can be changed also on the Top screen.

Top

Top

Top

3.6 Zoom Screen

3.6 Zoom Screen

M E

N U

S C

R E

E N

E3-52

3.6 Zoom Screen - Setting the zoom track to ON or OFF

The display is switched to the Zoom screen.

Top initial screen

Zoom screen

3 Move the key or key.

[ I-Gain ] [Trk]OFF A 1

A 2

V

[ ]MENU 1

Shtl VTR FRM1 RETR

1 Push the key, and move the key four times.Set

2 Move the key.

Move the left or right key to set the function to {ON} or {OFF}.

An underline appears below [Tracking]. The function set last or default function is highlighted.

Tracking: F-Hold: OFF

OFF

Movement

Zoom [ ]

Tracking F-Hold: Movement

Zoom [ ] OFF OFF

Tracking F-Hold: Movement

Zoom [ ] ON OFF

or

(D) Default value

(D) OFFSelection item

Function

ON

Zoom track disabled Zoom track enabled

Set 2 4MENU Zoom [ ]

The zoom track function can be set to ON or OFF.

Setting the zoom track to ON or OFF Top

Prior to operation, select the user for whom the settings will be made. (For details on how to select the user, refer to page E2-5 or E3-4.)

IMPORTANT

E3-53

3.6 Zoom Screen - Setting F-Hold to ON or OFF

The display is switched to the Zoom screen.

Top initial screen

Zoom screen

3 Move the key or key.

[ I-Gain ] [Trk]OFF A 1

A 2

V

[ ]MENU 1

Shtl VTR FRM1 RETR

1 Push the key, and move the key four times.Set

2 Move the key twice.

Move the left or right key to set the function to {ON} or {OFF}.

An underline appears below [F-Hold]. The function set last or default function is highlighted.

Tracking F-Hold: Movement

Zoom [ ] OFF OFF

Tracking F-Hold: Movement

Zoom [ ] OFF ON

Tracking: F-Hold: OFF

OFF

Movement

Zoom [ ]

or

(D) Default value

(D) OFFSelection item

Function

ON

F-Hold disabled F-Hold enabled

Set 2 4 2MENU Zoom [ ]

F-Hold can be set to ON or OFF. The same F-Hold setting can be used for all the users regardless of the user who is indicated on the display. For this reason, there is no need to select the user before performing the setting. As an exception to the gen- eral rule, any change made in the setting is reected for user 0 as well.

Note: The F-Hold setting is not reset even when the steps described in resetting on page E3-6 are taken.

Note: When Iris is set as Auto, F-Hold can not be set on.

Setting F-Hold to ON or OFF

M E

N U

S C

R E

E N

Note: The F-Hold setting is not stored in the memory when the power is turned off. When the power is turned on again, {OFF} is established as the default setting.

E3-54

3.6 Zoom Screen - Setting the zoom servo start characteristics

The display is switched to the Zoom screen.

Top initial screen

Zoom screen

Movement screen

Screen A

3 Push the key.

4 Move the key.

6 Push the key.

[ I-Gain ] [Trk]OFF A 1

A 2

V

[ ]MENU 1

Shtl VTR FRM1 RETR

5 Move the key or key.

1 Push the key, and move the key four times.Set

Set

Set

2 Move the key three times.

The display is switched to the Movement screen.

Move the left or right key until the function to be changed to appears.

An underline appears below [Movement].

An underline appears below [Start]. The function set last or default function is highlighted.

The display returns to Screen A.

Movement Zoom

Stop: Start:

[ ]

99 91

Movement Zoom

Stop: Start:

[ ]

97 91

Movement Zoom

Stop: Start:

[ ]

D99 91

Tracking: F-Hold: OFF

OFF

OFF

Movement

Zoom [ ]

F-Hold: Movement CurveMode

Zoom [ ]

or

(D) Default value

(D) 00Selection item

Function

99

Slow start Quick start

Set SetSet2 4 3MENU Zoom [ ]

The characteristics applying when the zoom starts to move when a zoom operation is performed using a switch such as the zoom seesaw switch can be set.

Setting the zoom servo start characteristics

Prior to operation, select the user for whom the settings will be made. (For details on how to select the user, refer to page E2-5 or E3-4.)

IMPORTANT

E3-55

3.6 Zoom Screen - Setting the zoom servo stop characteristics

Setting the zoom servo stop characteristics

Top initial screen

Movement screen 3 Push the key.

4 Move the key twice.

6 Push the key.

[ I-Gain ] [Trk]OFF A 1

A 2

V

[ ]MENU 1

Shtl VTR FRM1 RETR

5 Move the key or key.

1 Push the key, and move the key four times.Set

Set

Set

2 Move the key three times.

Move the left or right key until the function to be changed to appears.

An underline appears below [Movement].

An underline appears below [Stop]. The function set last or default function is highlighted.

Movement Zoom

Stop: Start:

[ ]

99 91

Movement Zoom

End: Stop:

[ ]

D91 99

Movement Zoom

End: Stop:

[ ]

89 99

Tracking: F-Hold: OFF

OFF

OFF

Movement

Zoom [ ]

F-Hold: Movement CurveMode

Zoom [ ]

The display is switched to the Zoom screen.

Screen A

Zoom screen

The display is switched to the Movement screen.

The display returns to Screen A.

or

Default value 91

00Selection item

Function

99

Slow stop Quick stop

Set SetSet2 4 3 2MENU Zoom [ ]

The characteristics applying when a zoom operation, which has been performed using a switch such as the zoom seesaw switch, is stopped can be set.

M E

N U

S C

R E

E N

Prior to operation, select the user for whom the settings will be made. (For details on how to select the user, refer to page E2-5 or E3-4.)

IMPORTANT

E3-56

3.6 Zoom Screen - Setting the zoom mechanism end stop characteristics

Setting the zoom mechanism end stop characteristics

Movement screen 3 Push the key.

4 Move the key three times.

6 Push the key.

[ I-Gain ] [Trk]OFF A 1

A 2

V

[ ]MENU 1

Shtl VTR FRM1 RETR

5 Move the key or key.

The display is switched to the Zoom screen.

Screen A

The display is switched to the Movement screen.

The display returns to Screen A.

Zoom screen

Top initial screen

1 Push the key, and move the key four times.Set

Set

Set

2 Move the key three times.

Move the left or right key until the function to be changed to appears.

An underline appears below [Movement].

An underline appears below [End]. The function set last or default function is highlighted.

Movement Zoom

Stop: Start:

[ ]

99 91

Movement Zoom

End: Stop:

[ ]

D99 99

Movement Zoom

End: Stop:

[ ]

97 99

Tracking: F-Hold: OFF

OFF

OFF

Movement

Zoom [ ]

F-Hold: Movement CurveMode

Zoom [ ]

(D) Default value

(D)

or

00Selection item

Function

99

Slow stop Quick stop

Set SetSet2 4 3 3MENU Zoom [ ]

The characteristics applying when a zoom operation, which has been performed using a switch such as the zoom seesaw switch, is stopped at the zoom mechanism end can be set.

Prior to operation, select the user for whom the settings will be made. (For details on how to select the user, refer to page E2-5 or E3-4.)

IMPORTANT

E3-57

3.6 Zoom Screen - Setting the curve characteristics of the seesaw switch

CurveMode screen 3 Push the key.

4 Move the key.

6 Push the key.

[ I-Gain ] [Trk]OFF A 1

A 2

V

R

[ ]MENU 1

CurveMode Zoom

Demand: Seesaw:

[ ]

5 5

Shtl VTR FRM1 RET

5 Move the key or key.

The display is switched to the Zoom screen.

Screen A

The display is switched to the CurveMode screen.

The display returns to Screen A.

Zoom screen

Top initial screen

1 Push the key, and move the key four times.Set

Set

Set

2 Move the key four times.

Movement CurveMode SpeedAdj

Zoom [ ]

OFF

Move the left or right key until the function to be changed to appears.

An underline appears below [CurveMode].

CurveMode Zoom

Demand: Seesaw:

[ ]

5

CurveMode Zoom

Demand: Seesaw:

[ ]

5

The function set last or default function is highlighted.

D5

7

Tracking: F-Hold: OFF

OFF

Movement

Zoom [ ]

or

D Default value

1Selection item 2 3 4 D5 6 7 8 9

Set SetSet2 4 4MENU Zoom [ ]

The characteristics of the zoom speed can be varied in response to the amount by which zoom seesaw switch is pushed in. (Bear in mind that the display is switched to another screen when these characteristics are set.)

(1)

(9)

Zo om

s pe

ed

MAX

Amount by which zoom seesaw switch is pushed in Zoom direction

Wide angle Telephoto

Amount of change resulting from zoom mode adjustment

Setting the curve characteristics of the seesaw switch Top

M E

N U

S C

R E

E N

Prior to operation, select the user for whom the settings will be made. (For details on how to select the user, refer to page E2-5 or E3-4.)

IMPORTANT

E3-58

3.6 Zoom Screen - Setting the analog demand curve characteristics

CurveMode screen 3 Push the key.

4 Move the key twice.

6 Push the key.

[ I-Gain ] [Trk]OFF A 1

A 2

V

R

[ ]MENU 1

CurveMode Zoom

Demand: Seesaw:

[ ]

5 5

Shtl VTR FRM1 RET

5 Move the key or key.

1 Push the key, and move the key four times.Set

Set

Set

2 Move the key four times.

Movement CurveMode SpeedAdj

Zoom [ ]

OFF

Move the left or right key until the function to be changed to appears.

An underline appears below [CurveMode].

CurveMode Zoom

Demand: Seesaw:

[ ]

5

CurveMode Zoom

Demand: Seesaw:

[ ]

5

An underline appears below [Demand]. The function set last or default function highlighted.

D5

7

Tracking: F-Hold: OFF

OFF

Movement

Zoom [ ] The display is switched to the Zoom screen.

Screen A

The display is switched to the CurveMode screen.

The display returns to Screen A.

Zoom screen

Top initial screen

or

D Default value

1Selection item 2 3 4 D5 6 7 8 9

Set SetSet2 4 4 2MENU Zoom [ ]

The characteristics of the zoom speed can be varied in response to the amount by which the analog demand is tilted. (Bear in mind that the display is switched to another screen when these characteristics are set.)

(1)

(9)

Zo om

s pe

ed

MAX

Amount by which analog demand is tilted Zoom direction

Wide angle Telephoto

Amount of change resulting from zoom mode adjustment

Setting the analog demand curve characteristics Top

Prior to operation, select the user for whom the settings will be made. (For details on how to select the user, refer to page E2-5 or E3-4.)

IMPORTANT

E3-59

3.6 Zoom Screen - Setting the maximum value of the zoom speed control

Setting the maximum value of the zoom speed control

SpeedAdj screen 3 Push the key.

4 Move the key.

6 Push the key.

[ I-Gain ] [Trk]OFF A 1

A 2

V

[ ]MENU 1

SpeedAdj Zoom

Min: Max:

[ ]

99 01

R

Shtl VTR FRM1 RET

5 Move the key or key.

1 Push the key, and move the key four times.Set

Set

Set

2 Move the key five times.

Move the left or right key until the function to be changed to appears. * { } denotes the direction of the default value.

An underline appears below [SpeedAdj].

An underline appears below [Max]. The function set last or default value is highlighted. * {D} denotes the default value.

CurveMode SpeedAdj Control: Sped

Zoom [ ]

SpeedAdj Zoom

Min: Max:

[ ]

D99 01

SpeedAdj Zoom

Min: Max:

[ ]

97 01

The display is switched to the Zoom screen.

Screen A

The display is switched to the SpeedAdj screen.

The display returns to Screen A.

Zoom screen

Top initial screen

Tracking: F-Hold: OFF

OFF

Movement

Zoom [ ]

or

Default value 99

Minimum setting value 99

Set SetSet2 4 5MENU Zoom [ ]

Selection item

The value established when the maximum zoom speed control of the drive unit has been set to Max can be set.

M E

N U

S C

R E

E N

Prior to operation, select the user for whom the settings will be made. (For details on how to select the user, refer to page E2-5 or E3-4.)

IMPORTANT

E3-60

3.6 Zoom Screen - Setting the minimum value of the zoom speed control

SpeedAdj screen 3 Push the key.

4 Move the key twice.

5 Move the key twice.

6 Push the key.

[ I-Gain ] [Trk]OFF A 1

A 2

V

R

[ ]MENU 1

SpeedAdj Zoom

Min: Max:

[ ]

99 01

Shtl VTR FRM1 RET

1 Push the key, and move the key four times.Set

Set

Set

2 Move the key five times.

Move the left or right key until the function to be changed to appears. * { } denotes the direction of the default value.

CurveMode SpeedAdj Control: Sped

Zoom [ ]

SpeedAdj Zoom

Min: Max:

[ ]

03 99

SpeedAdj Zoom

Min: Max:

[ ]

99 D01

An underline appears below [SpeedAdj].

An underline appears below [Min]. The function set last or default value is highlighted. * {D} denotes the default value.

The display is switched to the Zoom screen.

Screen A

The display is switched to the SpeedAdj screen.

The display returns to Screen A.

Zoom screen

Top initial screen

Tracking: F-Hold: OFF

OFF

Movement

Zoom [ ]

Default value 01

or

01 Maxium setting value

Set SetSet2 4 5 2MENU Zoom [ ]

Selection item

The value established when the maximum zoom speed control of the drive unit has been set to Min can be set.

Setting the minimum value of the zoom speed control

Prior to operation, select the user for whom the settings will be made. (For details on how to select the user, refer to page E2-5 or E3-4.)

IMPORTANT

E3-61

3.6 Zoom Screen - Setting the servo type from the zoom demand

3 Move the key or key.

[ I-Gain ] [Trk]OFF A 1

A 2

V

R

[ ]MENU 1

Shtl VTR FRM1 RET

The display is switched to the Zoom screen.

Zoom screen

Top initial screen

1 Push the key, and move the key four times.Set

2 Move the key five times.

SpeedAdj Control: VR-Dem: ON

Zoom [ ]

Sped

SpeedAdj Control: VR-Dem: ON

Zoom [ ]

Posi

An underline appears below [Control]. The function set last or default function is highlighted.

Move the left or right key to select {Sped} or {Posi}.

Tracking: F-Hold: OFF

OFF

Movement

Zoom [ ]

or

(D) Default value

(D)SpedSelection item

Function

Posi

Speed servo Position servo

Set 2 4 6MENU Zoom [ ]

Either the speed servo or position servo can be set as the servo type from the zoom demand.

Note: When {Posi} has been selected, the seesaw switch can no longer be used. When {Posi} has been selected, only one demand connector can be connected. Normally, {Sped} is selected.

Setting the servo type from the zoom demand

M E

N U

S C

R E

E N

Prior to operation, select the user for whom the settings will be made. (For details on how to select the user, refer to page E2-5 or E3-4.)

IMPORTANT

E3-62

3.6 Zoom Screen - Setting the zoom speed control to ON or OFF for the zoom demand

3 Move the key or key.

[ I-Gain ] [Trk]OFF A 1

A 2

V

R

[ ]MENU 1

Shtl VTR FRM1 RET

The display is switched to the Zoom screen.

Zoom screen

Top initial screen

1 Push the key, and move the key four times.Set

2 Move the key seven times.

An underline appears below [VR-Dem]. The function set last or default function is highlighted.

Move the left or right key to select {ON} or {OFF}.

Tracking: F-Hold: OFF

OFF

Movement

Zoom [ ]

Control: VR-Dem: DType: 300M

Zoom [ ]

ON Sped

Control: VR-Dem: DType: 300M

Zoom [ ]

OFF Sped

or

(D) Default value

(D) ONSelection item

Function

OFF

Enabled Disabled

Set 2 4 7MENU Zoom [ ]

The maximum zoom speed adjustment of the drive unit can be set to ON or OFF for the zoom demand.

Setting the zoom speed control to ON or OFF for the zoom demand

Prior to operation, select the user for whom the settings will be made. (For details on how to select the user, refer to page E2-5 or E3-4.)

IMPORTANT

E3-63

3.6 Zoom Screen - Setting the zoom demand specifications

3 Move the key or key.

[ I-Gain ] [Trk]OFF A 1

A 2

V

R

[ ]MENU 1

Shtl VTR FRM1 RET

The display is switched to the Zoom screen.

Zoom screen

Top initial screen

1 Push the key, and move the key four times.Set

2 Move the key eight times.

Move the left or right key until the function to be changed to appears.

An underline appears below [DType]. The last setting or default value is highlighted.

Tracking: F-Hold: OFF

OFF

Movement

Zoom [ ]

Control: VR-Dem: DType:

Zoom [ ]

ON Sped

300M

Control: VR-Dem: DType:

Zoom [ ]

ON Sped

300A

or

(D) Default value

(D)300MSelection item

Function

300A

When the ZSD-300M is used

When the ZSD-300A is used

Set 2 4 8MENU Zoom [ ]

Two kinds of VTR switches, a momentary type and alternate type, are provided on the zoom demand. Both of these switches can be set. Since the momentary type is normally used, select "300M." Select "300A" only when a zoom demand such as the "ZSD-300A" or "ZGA-200A" is to be used.

Setting the zoom demand specifications

M E

N U

S C

R E

E N

Prior to operation, select the user for whom the settings will be made. (For details on how to select the user, refer to page E2-5 or E3-4.)

IMPORTANT

E3-65

Page

Focus demand curve characteristics (A type lenses only) .................................................................E3-66

3.7 Focus Screen

3.7 Focus Screen

M E

N U

S C

R E

E N

E3-66

or

Default value 5

1Selection item

Function

9

Large curve Small curve

Set Set Set2MENU Focus [ ]

[ I-Gain ] [Trk]OFF A 1

A 2

V

R

[ ]MENU 1

Focus [ ] CurveMode

CurveMode screen 3 Push the key.

4 Move the key.

6 Push the key.

Set

Set

An underline appears below [ADemand]. The last setting or default value is highlighted.

ADemand: 5

Focus [ ] CurveMode

CurveMode ADemand: D5

Focus [ ]

CurveMode ADemand: 7

Focus [ ]

5 Move the key or key.

Shtl VTR FRM1 RET

The display is switched to the Focus screen.

Screen A

The display is switched to the CurveMode screen.

The display returns to Screen A.

Focus screen

Top initial screen

1 Push the key, and move the key twice.Set

2 Move the key.

Move the left or right key until the function to be changed to appears.

An underline appears below [CurveMode].

CurveMode Focus [ ]

The curve characteristics can be set for analog focus demand operations.

Stan da

rd

1

9

Knob position

Fo cu

s po

si tio

n

Infinity

Close range

Note: The focus demand has a curve selector switch, and these characteristics take effect when the switch has been set to FAR.

3.7 Focus Screen - Focus demand curve characteristics (A type lenses only)

Focus demand curve characteristics (A type lenses only)

Prior to operation, select the user for whom the settings will be made. (For details on how to select the user, refer to page E2-5 or E3-4.)

IMPORTANT

E3-67

3.8 Info Screen

Page

Encoder output setting .........................................................................................................................E3-68

Initialize operation setting .....................................................................................................................E3-69

Setting the camera serial communication to ON or OFF ......................................................................E3-71

Adjustment of Camera Fol Voltage .......................................................................................................E3-72

3.8 Info Screen

M E

N U

S C

R E

E N

E3-68

3.8 Info Screen - Encoder output setting

The encoder output function for zoom and focus can be enabled or disabled. The encoder can be out put from the virtual connector if the setting is set as enabled. For further details, consult a Canon sales representative or your dealer.

3 Move the key or key.

The display is switched to the Info screen.

Top initial screen

Info screen

[ I-Gain ] [Trk]OFF A 1

A 2

V

R

[ ]MENU 1

Shtl VTR FRM1 RET

2 Move the key.

An underline appears below [Encoder].

Move the left or right key to set the function to {ON} or {OFF}.

1 Push the key, and move the key twice.Set

Encoder: OFF Initialize

Info

Encoder: INDOFF

INDON

Initialize

Info

Encoder: Initialize CamSeri:

Info

CamSeri:

CamSeri: ON

ON

ON

(D) Default value

(D)

2

Selection item

Function

orSet

OFF ON

Output disabled Output enabled

MENU Info 1

Encoder output setting

No need for user selection before proceeding.

(NOTE)

E3-69

3.8 Info Screen - Initialize operation setting

The system can be set the lens position when the power is turned ON. Since the lens features an encoder, the correct position of the lens must be detected each time the power is turned ON. If the initialize operation has been set to ON, then when the power is turned ON, the lens operates the initialize operation automati- cally which detects its position. If it has been set to OFF, the lens position is detected when, in the course of normal operation, the lens has passed a specific position (normally near the center). However, at the initialize operation ON setting, the same operation as for the OFF setting will be performed if the lens is set to Manual.

Servo / manual switch Selection item

Servo / manual switch Selection item

How the lens position is detected

How the lens position is detected

Servo

Servo

Manual

Manual

ON

ON

ON or OFF

ON or OFF

OFF

OFF

When the power is turned on, the lens operates automatically and its position is detected. Then, it returns to where it was positioned when the power was turned on. The lens position is detected while performing motorized zooming. The lens position is detected while operating the zoom ring manually.

ZOOM

Demand/ no demand

No demand

Demand

No demand

Demand

No conditions

When the power is turned on, the lens operates automatically and its position is detected. Then, it moves to the position of the demand's command signal.

When the power is turned on, the lens operates automatically and its position is detected. Then it moves to the position of the demand's command signal.

When the power is turned on, the lens operates automatically and its position is detected. Then, it returns to where it was positioned when the power was turned on.

FOCUS

The lens position is not detected. When the demand is connected, the lens position is automatically detected, and then the lens moves to the position of the demand's command signal.

The lens position is detected by operating the focus ring manually.

NOTE 1: The follow-up voltage sent back to the camera and numerical values on the Fol screen are output correctly after the lens position has been detected.

NOTE 2: The lens cannot be controlled during the initialize operation. The initialize operation is completed with the re- turn of the lens to where it was positioned before initialization commenced. However, if the lens is controlled by position, it will move to the control position rather than returning to where it was positioned before initialization commenced.

NOTE 3: When switched from manual mode to servo mode after power-up, the lens will automatically detect the position unless initialization has not been completed if the setting of initialization is auto [on].

NOTE 4: In the case of a type which does not incorporate a focus motor, the FOCUS settings cannot be performed. Operating the focus ring manually performs initialization for position detection.

NOTE 5: The initialize operation is always performed for the iris when the power is turned on. NOTE 6: When the initialize operation is set to OFF, and the lens is in the Servo condition, it is impossible to use these

functions: Shuttle Shot, Framing Preset, Speed Preset and Zoom Track because of uncompleted the lens position after

the power is turned ON. To operate those functions, perform the lens position by turning the Servo switch. NOTE 7: If the settings related to initialization are changed after the power is turned ON, the changes will not take ef-

fect. For the changes in the settings to take effect, turn the power OFF and then turn it back on.

Initialize

Error!

Initialization Error Initialize Error! appears on the display unless the lens is set to the servo mode or if the lens is mechanically locked. In such case, check the lens condition, clear the problem, and then turn off and on the power again.

Initialize operation setting

M E

N U

S C

R E

E N

Error Display Screen

E3-70

3.8 Info Screen - Initialize operation setting

4 The zoom initialize operation setting is established by moving the key. The focus zoom initialize operation setting can be established by moving the key twice.

5 Move the key or key.

6 For the changes in the settings to take effect, turn the power off and then turn it back on.

Turn the power off and then turn it back on.

The display is switched to the Info screen.

Top initial screen

Info screen

[ I-Gain ] [Trk]OFF A 1

A 2

V

R

[ ]MENU 1

Shtl VTR FRM1 RET

2 Move the key twice.

An underline appears below [Initialize].

Select {Zoom} or {Focus}.

Move the left or right key to select {ON} or {OFF}.

1 Push the key, and move the key twice.Set

3 Push the key.Set

Encoder: OFF

OFF Initialize

Info

Encoder: Info

Initialize Info

OFF OFF

Zoom: Focus:

Initialize Info

OFF Zoom: Focus:

OFF

Initialize Info

OFF Zoom: Focus:

ON

Initialize CamSeri: ON

CamSeri: ON

2 2or or

POWER OFF POWER ON

Set SetMENU Info

No need for user selection before proceeding.

(NOTE)

E3-71

3.8 Info Screen - Setting the camera serial communication to ON or OFF

As an interface between the camera and the lens, two ways of control, the serial communication control and the analog control, are used. Use this setting to switch between the automatic identification setting and the analog control setting of the interface. The default setting is ON: enabled and with this setting, the lens automatically identifies the control setting as whether the serial communication control or the analog control. Set to OFF: disabled for selecting the analog control as an interface between the lens and the camera.

The display is switched to the User screen.

Top initial screen

Info screen

[ I-Gain ] [Trk]OFF A 1

A 2

V

R

[ ]MENU 1

Shtl VTR FRM1 RET

2 Move the key six times.

1 Push the key.Set

The display is switched to the Info screen.

3 Move the key three times.

An underline appears below [CamSeri].

4 Move the key or key.

Move the left or right key to select {ON} or {OFF}.

User screen

No. : User

1 Name: ResetAll

1

Encoder: OFF

ON

Info

Initialize CamSeri:

Info

OFF

Info

CamSeri: Initialize

ON

CamSeri: Initialize

Adjust

Adjust

(D) Default value

(D)Selection item

Function

ON OFF

Camera serial communication enabled

or

Camera serial communication disabled

3Set 6MENU Info

Setting the camera serial communication to ON or OFF

M E

N U

S C

R E

E N

E3-72

3.8 Info Screen - Adjustment of Camera Fol Voltage

Adjustment of Camera Fol Voltage

The camera fol voltage is adjusted at the time of shipment. There is no need to change usually. However, the lens side can be changed by the situation on the camera side (indicators, etc.). The camera fol voltage is used by all users. There are the voltages sent back to the camera for zoom, iris and focus. A password is required in order to ensure that the content of the setting is not easily changed. Please contact Canon Inc. or the distributing agent when you need the password. This operation cannot be done in the analog mode.

3 Push the key.

4 Move the key or key.

5 Move the key once to select Iris.

Move the key twice to select Zoom.

Move the key three times to select Focus.

Then, push the key.

The display is switched to the Info screen.

Top initial screen

Info screen

[ I-Gain ] [Trk]OFF A 1

A 2

V

R

[ ]MENU 1

Shtl VTR FRM1 RET

Continued on next page

2 Move the key four times.

An underline appears below [Adjust].

1 Push the key, and move the key twice.

Set

Set

The display is switched to the Camera Fol screen.

Set

The display now changes to the EnterPassword screen.

Set

Encoder: OFF Initialize

Info

Initialize Info

Adjust Camera Fol

CamSeri:

Adjust

Iris: Zoom: Focus:

Camera Fol

EnterPassword

ON

CamSeri: ON

E3-73

3.8 Info Screen - Adjustment of Camera Fol Voltage

7 Move the key or key.

6 Enter the password, and push the key.

Continued from Previous page

8 Move the key or key.

9 To finish, push the DISPLAY key.

To select another item, move the key.

Set

Please contact Canon Inc. or the distributing agent for the password that is needed for this operation. When the password is entered and the key is pushed, the data of the selected item is displayed. When this operation is performed for the first time, the factory default settings at the time of shipment will be displayed. These are the values that have been adjusted to each individual lens. Make a note of them in case they are to be restored.

Set F2.8: F16:

Camera Fol

37150 26910

F2.8: F16:

Camera Fol

26910

F2.8: F16:

Camera Fol

26910

37150

37190

Note 1: The factory default settings at the time of shipment will not be restored even when the reset operation is changed.

Note 2: The operation is possible even in the state of the lock. Note 3: The password is invalid when the power is turned off. Note 4: If the power is turned off without taking step 9, the changed data will not be saved. Note 5: Password character input Locate the characters using the up and down keys, and move from one character to another or make

corrections using the left and right keys.

The numerical value is a rela- tive value display. Please note that making a radical change from the original value has the possibility to inuence other equipment even though it possible to select from 00000 to 65530.

Set

MENU

or

Set Set

or DISPLAY

Set

Set

42

N Password

Info Adjust

Camera Fol

Camera Fol

Selection item Selection range

Iris

Zoom

Focus

Reference: The numerical values in parentheses are the reference values for the factory defaults at the time of shipment.

F2. 8 F16

: 00000 (37150) 65530 : 00000 (26910) 65530

Wide Tele

: 00000 (05000) 65530 : 00000 (52000) 65530

Near Far

: 00000 (05000) 65530 : 00000 (52000) 65530

M E

N U

S C

R E

E N

E3-75

3.9 Fol. Screen

Page

Lens follow-up displays (iris, zoom and focus) ....................................................................................... 3-76

3.9 Fol. Screen

M E

N U

S C

R E

E N

E3-76

Fol. 1SetMENU

The display is switched to the Fol. screen, and the iris, zoom and focus follow-up values are displayed as relative values.

[ I-Gain ] [Trk]OFF A 1

A 2

V

R

[ ]MENU 1

Fol. Iris: Zoom: Focus:

0940 0527

0011

1

Shtl VTR FRM1 RET

1 Move the key or key.SetFol. screen

Top initial screen

The entire ranges over which the iris, zoom and focus operate mechanically are each displayed as a relative value from 0 to 1000.

Note: The display is not automatically turned off during the Fol. screen even when no operation has been un- dertaken for more than two minutes.

To turn off the display, press the DISPLAY key.

3.9 Fol. Screen - Lens follow-up displays (iris, zoom and focus)

Lens follow-up displays (iris, zoom and focus)

E4-1

4 List of Setting

E4-2

List of Setting

Top

MENU

[ ]

[ Trk ]

A 1

V

A 2

R

[ Frm1 ]

[ Frm2 ]

AM

[ I-Tq ]

To *1 of the following page

To *3 of the following page

To *4 of the following page

Default Value PageSelecting item

VTR

Shtl

OFF

1

RET

FRM1

Norm

Zoom

H

Shtl / NON / VTR / RET / FRM1 / FRM2 / Sped

1 / 2 / 3 / 4 / 5 / 6 / 7 / 8 / 9 / A / 0

E2-25

E2-19~E2-21

E2-22~E2-24

E2-28

E2-29

E2-4

E1-3

E2-14

E2-15

E2-16

E2-17

E2-18

[ Z.M. ]

To *2 of the following page E2-26,E2-27

OFF / ON

VTR / RET / FRM1 / FRM2 / Sped / Shtl

FRM1 / FRM2 / Sped / Shtl / NON / VTR / RET

RET / FRM1 / FRM2 / Sped / Shtl / VTR

Norm / Reve / Auto / Manu

Zoom / Iris

H / L

E3-26 Hold down the Display sw and Set key for more than 2 seconds.

Jump to the user 0 setting status.Escape operation

[ I-Gain ]

To *5 of the following page E2-12,E2-13

E4-3

List of Setting

MENU

Zoom Focus

Iris Zoom Focus

User

Go Top

No. 1 / 2 / 3 / 4 / 5 / 6 / 7 / 8 / 9 / A / 0

1 / 2 / 3 / 4 / 5 / 6 / 7 / 8 / 9

y/n y/n

y/n y/n

/ / A Z / a z / 0 9 Name Reset

User AllUser

AllCopy

Zoom Focus

Zoom Focus

Start Stop

To No

Copy

Copy

AUX1 AUX2

Frame1

Frame2

ZSpeed ZMovement

VTR RET A/M SSaw

Switch

Preset

Auto Remote

[I-Gain]

Torque Comp Close

Iris

Seesaw Demand

Start Stop

Max Min

Tracking F-Hold

CurveMode

Movement

SpeedAdj

Control VR-Dem DType

Zoom

Focus CurveMode ADemand

#1

#2

#3

to *6

3

4

5

2

1

from *6

Iris Zoom Focus

Fol.

Shtl / NON / VTR / RET / FRM1 / FRM2 / Sped

VTR / RET / FRM1 / FRM2 / Sped / Shtl FRM1 / FRM2 / Sped / Shtl / NON / VTR / RET

RET / FRM1 / FRM2 / Sped / Shtl / VTR Nomal / Revers / Auto / Manual Zoom / Iris

Shtl

VTR FRM1

Unlock Unlock/Lock

1

n y

y/ny

n n

1

RET Nomal Zoom

PRE / FASTPRE

001 ~ 800800

PRE / FASTPRE

ON / OFF

ON / OFF

OFF / ON

OFF / ON

00 ~ 99 00 ~ 99

ON

ON

OFF

OFF

High / Low ON / OFF

High

ON OFF / ONOFF

OFF / ONOFF OFF / ONOFF

Sped / PosiSped ON / OFFON

OFF / ONOFF

OFF / ONOFF OFF / ONOFF

< >

< >

< >

300M / 300A 300M

(0000 ~ 1000)(**) (0000 ~ 1000)(**) (0000 ~ 1000)

00000 ~ 65530 00000 ~ 65530 00000 ~ 65530

(**)

1 ~ 9 1 ~ 9

5 5

00 ~ 99 00 ~ 99

99 91

End 00 ~ 9999

Minimum setting value 99 01 ~ Maximum setting value

99

1 ~ 95

01

99 91

01 ~ 99 01 ~ 99

Setting value using the iris gain adjusting trimmer

90

from *1

6

to *1

[ ]

Encoder Initialize

Adjust

Info

Default value Selecting item Page

UserCopy To Other Lens Access

( ) The setting item which is indicated within the brackets can not be changed.

#1~3 This item dies not appear with the R type lens.

< > The factory default settings established at the time of shipment can be changed. Up key operation

Set key operation Right key operation

Left key operation

E3-4 E3-5

E3-2

E3-6 E3-7

E3-8

E3-9 E3-10,E3-11 E3-12,E3-13

E3-15~E3-18 E3-28 E3-29 E3-30 E3-31 E3-32 E3-33

E3-36 E3-37 E3-38 E3-39 E3-40 E3-41

E3-42

E3-43 E3-44

E3-46 E3-47

E3-48 E3-49 E3-50

E3-52 E3-53

E3-54 E3-55 E3-56

E3-57 E3-58

E3-59 E3-60 E3-61 E3-62 E3-63

E3-66

E3-68

E3-70 E3-70

E3-76 E3-76 E3-76

E3-72 E3-72 E3-72

CamSeri ON/OFF ON E3-71

LI ST

O F

SE TT

IN G

Pb

Hg

Cd

Cr (V I)

PB B

PB DE

SJ /T

1 13

64

GB

/T 2

65 72

GB

/T 2 65 72

FO R P. R. C. O NL Y

C1

BCTV

CD-ROM

C2

.......................................................................... C2

.............................................................. C5

.......................................................... C9

......................................................... C11

............................................................... C12

1.

1.1 ............................................................ C1-2

Top ...........................................................................C1-2

MENU ..........................................................................C1-3

2. Top

2.1 Top ............................................................ C2-2

2.2 .................................................................... C2-4

(User 0 9) .............................................................C2-5

(User A) ...........................................................C2-6

(User A) ...........................................................C2-9

2.3 ......................................................... C2-12

(1) .......................................................C2-12

(2) .......................................................C2-13

2.4 ON/OFF ................................................ C2-14

2.5 AUX1 .................................................... C2-15

2.6 VTR ..................................................... C2-16

2.7 AUX2 .................................................... C2-17

2.8 RET ..................................................... C2-18

2.9 Frame Preset1 ................................................... C2-19

(1) Frame Preset1 .............................................C2-19

(2) Frame Preset1 ON/OFF ..........................................C2-20

(3) Frame Preset1 ON/OFF A .........................C2-21

2.10 Frame Preset2 .................................................. C2-22

(1) Frame Preset2 ..............................................C2-22

(2) Frame Preset2 ON/OFF ..........................................C2-23

(3) Frame Preset2 ON/OFF A .........................C2-24

2.11 ........................................................ C2-25

2.12 .................................................... C2-26

(1) .......................................................C2-26

(2) .............................................C2-27

2.13 A/M .................................................... C2-28

2.14 ........................................................ C2-29

C3

3. MENU

3.1 MENU ........................................................... C3-2

3.2 User ................................................................ C3-3

(User 0 9) ............................................................C3-4

........................................................................C3-5

..............................................................................C3-6

(1) ........................................................C3-6

(2) ........................................................C3-7

................................................C3-8

.................................................................C3-10

(1) .......................................C3-10

(2) .......................................C3-12

(3) .........................................................C3-14

(User 0 9) .......................................................C3-15

(User A) ............................................................C3-19

(User A) ............................................................C3-23

.........................................................................C3-26

3.3 Switch ............................................................. C3-27

AUX1 ..............................................................C3-28

AUX2 ..............................................................C3-29

VTR ...............................................................C3-30

RET ...............................................................C3-31

A/M ...........................................................C3-32

...............................................................C3-33

3.4 Preset ............................................................. C3-35

Frame Preset1 .....................................................C3-36

Frame Preset1 ON/OFF ..................................................C3-37

Frame Preset1 ON/OFF A.................................C3-38

Frame Preset2 .....................................................C3-39

Frame Preset2 ON/OFF ..................................................C3-40

Frame Preset2 ON/OFF A .................................C3-41

.........................................................C3-42

.........................................................C3-43

.......................................................C3-44

3.5 Iris ............................................................... C3-45

...................................................................C3-46

(1) .........................................................C3-46

(2) .........................................................C3-47

...................................................................C3-48

ON/OFF ............................................................C3-49

ON/OFF ........................................................C3-50

3.6 Zoom ............................................................... C3-51

ON/OFF ..............................................................C3-52

F-Hold ON/OFF ..............................................................C3-53

...........................................................C3-54

...........................................................C3-55

.......................................................C3-56

...............................................................C3-57

.....................................................C3-58

C4

.......................................................C3-59

.......................................................C3-60

.....................................................C3-61

/ .......................................C3-62

.........................................................C3-63

3.7 Focus .............................................................. C3-65

A .....................................C3-66

3.8 Info ............................................................... C3-67

...................................................................C3-68

...................................................................C3-69

/ ...................................................C3-71

...............................................................C3-72

3.9 Fol. ............................................................... C3-75

IrisZoomFocus ...............................................C3-76

4.

.....................................................................

C5

C6

1.

2. ,

1.

2.

3.

4.

5.

1.

2.

3.

4.

5.

C7

1.

1.

1.

2.

1.

1.

C8

1.

2.

3.

4.

5.

6.

100005

89 15

: +86(0)10-8513-9999

: +86(0)10-8513-9915

C9

2.9 Frame Preset1

(1) Frame Preset1

1

2

3

4

*

*

[ I-Gain ] [Trk]OFF Shtl VTRA 1

FRM1A 2

V

RETR

[ ]MENU 1

Set

Set

1

[ I-Tq ] H [ Z.M. ] [ Frm1 ] [ Frm2 ]

FRM1A 2 RETR

[ ]MENU

Frame1: Preset

PRE

Focus: OFF Zoom: ON

Frame1: Preset

FAST

Focus: OFF Zoom: ON

(D)

Set

PRE FAST

MENU Set4 [ Frm1 ]

2.9 Frame Preset1 - Frame Preset1

C2-19

[ Frm1 ]

T O P

C10

C11

DISPLAY

PUSH Set

[ I-Gain ] [Trk]OFF Shtl VTRA 1

FRM1A 2

V

RETR

[ ]MENU 1

DISPLAY

DISPLAY

DISPLAY

1

2

3

4

[ I-Gain ] [Trk]OFF Shtl VTRA 1

FRM1A 2

V

RETR

[ ]MENU 1

C2-2

Point

Fol.

Point

,

C12

C3-6

ResetAll User

User: AllUser:

1

y/n y/n

C1-1

1

C1-2

1.1

1.1

Top

Top

Fig.1-1

14 8

Fig.1-2

1. MENU

2.

3.

4. ON/OFF

5. AUX1

6. VTR

7. AUX2

8. RET

9. Frame Preset1

10. Frame Preset2

11.

12.

13. A/M

14.

[ I-Gain ] [Trk]OFF Shtl VTRA 1

FRM1A 2

V

RETR

[ ]MENU 1

Fig1-1

2. Top

Fig1-2

[ Frm1 ] [ Frm2 ] [ ]MENU 1

NormAM Zoom [ Z.M. ][ I-Tq ] H

33 3

Top

MENU

Top 14

C1-3

1.1

MENU

3. MENU

1.User ....... Fig.1-3

2.Switch ....... Fig.1-4

3.Preset ....... Fig.1-5

4.Iris ....... Fig.1-6

5.Zoom ....... Fig.1-7

6.Focus *2 ....... Fig.1-8

7.Info. ....... Fig.1-9

8.Fol. ....... Fig.1-10

No. : User

1 Name: ResetAll

1

User

Fig1-3

No. : User

1 Name: ResetAll

1

Switch

Fig1-4

Switch 1

VTR:V

A 1

AUX2:A 2

VTR

AUX1: FRM1 Shtl

Preset

Fig1-5

Frame1: Preset

PRE Frame2: PRE ZSpeed: 800

Iris

Fig1-6

Iris [ ] [ I-Gain ] Torque: High Comp: ON

Zoom

Fig1-7

Tracking: F-Hold: OFF

OFF

Movement

Zoom [ ]

Focus

Fig1-8

CurveMode Focus [ ]

Fol.

Fig1-10

Fol. Iris: Zoom: Focus:

0940 0527

0011

1

Info

Fig1-9

Info

Initialize CamSeri: ON

Encoder: OFF

MENU

33 3 8R 7

MENU *1

*1 MENU 8

*2 R

Top MENU Set User

[ ]

1

C2-1

2 Top

C2-2

2.1 Top

2.1 Top

Top

Top 14 Top

,

1

[ I-Gain ] [Trk]OFF

Shtl VTRA 1

FRM1A 2

V

RETR

[ ]MENU 1

[ I-Tq ] H [ Z.M. ]

[ Frm2 ][ Frm1 ]

ZoomNormAM

Top

9 10

11 12

13 14

1

3

5

7

4

6

8

2

ShtlA 1

5

ft

m

1x

2x

A 1

A 2

V

R

AM

14

13

8

5

6

7

C2-3

2.1 Top

VTR

Frame Preset2

AUX1

AUX2

A/M

Frame Preset1

C2-14

C2-16

C2-15

C2-17

C3-1

1

2

3

4

9

10

11

12[Trk]

A 1

A 2

V

R

[ ]

MENUMENU

[ I-Tq ] [ I-Gain ]

[ Frm2 ]

[ Frm1 ]

AM

RET

C2-22

C2-12

C2-29

C2-28

C2-25

C2-19

C2-18

C2-4 C2-5 C2-6 C2-9

C2-26

[ Z.M. ]

13

14

5

7

6

8

C2-4

2.2

2.2

[ ]

User 1 9

9User 1 9

User 0

User 1 9 User User0

User0 EscapeC3-26User 0

F-Hold

User A ( )

( )

VTRRETIRIS A/MIRIS INST

AUX1AUX2MEMO

C2-6 C2-11

C2-5

2.2 - (User 0 9)

(User 0 9) [ ]

Top User 0 9UserA

User 0 9 MENU 3. MENU User A

[ ] 1

[ ] 2

Set

1

2

Set4

3

[ I-Gain ] [Trk]OFF Shtl VTRA 1

FRM1A 2

V

RETR

[ ]MENU 1

[ I-Gain ] [Trk]OFF Shtl VTRA 1

FRM1A 2

V

RETR

[ ]MENU 1

[ I-Gain ] [Trk]OFF Shtl VTRA 1

FRM1A 2

V

RETR

[ ]MENU 2

Top

SetMENU [ ] 1 Set

0 (D)1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 A

C2-6

2.2 - (User A)

(User A)[ ]

User A ( )

( )

VTRRETIRIS A/MIRIS INST

AUX1AUX2MEMO

[ ] A I G : 5 0 I G : 5 0 [ ] Lock

Unlock

Lock Unlock

8

( )

C2-7

2.2 - (User A)

1

[ I-Gain ] [Trk]OFF Shtl VTRA 1

FRM1A 2

V

RETR

[ ]MENU 1

Set

Set

Set

3

4

5

2

[ I-Gain ] [Trk]OFF Shtl VTRA 1

FRM1A 2

V

RETR

[ ]MENU 1

[ ] A I G : 5 0

[ ] A I G : 5 0

AnalogMode Lock / Unlock

Top

MENU [ ] 1 Set [ ] A Set Set

0 (D)1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 A

(1)

[ ]

C2-8

2.2 - (User A)

(D)

(D) A B C D E F G H I J K L M N O P Q R S T U V W X Y Z a b c d e f g h i j k l m n o p q r s t u v w x y z 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9

(D)

(D) Unlock Lock

MENU [ ] 1 [ ] ASet Set Set

Set Set

1

[ I-Gain ] [Trk]OFF Shtl VTRA 1

FRM1A 2

V

RETR

[ ]MENU 1

Set

Set

Set

3

2

[ I-Gain ] [Trk]OFF Shtl VTRA 1

FRM1A 2

V

RETR

[ ]MENU 1

[ ] A I G : 5 0

EnterPassword

AnalogMode Lock / Unlock

4

Set

Set

5

6

7

EnterPassword

Lock OK? y/n

[ ] Lock I G : 5 0

Top

(2)

[ ]

C2-9

2.2 - (User A)

(User A) [ ]

Unlock

(1)

1 Set

[ ] A

3 Set

2

I G : 50

I G : 55

[ ] A

I G : 5 0

I G : 5 5

SetSet

01 99

I G : 5 0

User A ( )

( )

VTRRETIRIS A/MIRIS INST

AUX1AUX2MEMO

[ ] A I G : 5 0 I G : 5 0 [ ] Lock

C2-10

2.2 - (User A)

(2)

1 Set

[ ] A I G : 5 0

[ ] A I G : 5 0

3 Set

2

[ I-Gain ] [Trk]OFF Shtl VTRA 1

FRM1A 2

V

RETR

[ ]MENU 0

[ I-Gain ] [Trk]OFF Shtl VTRA 1

FRM1A 2

V

RETR

[ ]MENU 0

I :

(Unlock)

SetSet I G : 5 0

[ ]

C2-11

2.2 - (User A)

1 Set

[ ] Lock I G : 5 0

[ ] Lock I G : 5 0

2

I :

EnterPassword

Set3

Set4

Set

Set

5

EnterPassword

Unlock OK? y/n

[ ] A I G : 5 0

[ ] A I G : 5 0

6

[ I-Gain ] [Trk]OFF Shtl VTRA 1

FRM1A 2

V

RETR

[ ]MENU 1

(Lock )

Set Set Set Set

Set

(D)

I G : 5 0

(D) A B C D E F G H I J K L M N O P Q R S T U V W X Y Z a b c d e f g h i j k l m n o p q r s t u v w x y z 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9

[ ]

C2-12

2.3 -

(1)

--> A/M

AUTO

-->

AUTO

hunting

C3-6

[ I-Gain ] [Trk]OFF Shtl VTRA 1

FRM1A 2

V

RETR

[ ]MENU 1

2 Set

5 Set

4

Top

I-Gain

3

1

[ I-Gain ] Iris

Remote: 90 Auto: 73

[ ]

[ I-Gain ] Iris

Remote: 90 Auto: 73

[ ]

[ I-Gain ] Iris

Remote: 90 Auto: 71

[ ]

[ I-Gain ] [Trk]OFF Shtl VTRA 1

FRM1A 2

V

RETR

[ ]MENU 1

A

Set

01 99

MENU Set[ I-Gain ]

2.3 [ I-Gain ]

C2-13

2.3 -

(2)

--> A/M

AUTO

-->

Remote

[ I-Gain ] [Trk]OFF Shtl VTRA 1

FRM1A 2

V

RETR

[ ]MENU 1

2 Set

5 Set

4

Top

I-Gain

3

1

[ I-Gain ] Iris

Remote: 90 Auto: 48

[ ]

[ I-Gain ] Iris

Remote: 90 Auto: 48

[ ]

[ I-Gain ] Iris

Remote: 80 Auto: 48

[ ]

[ I-Gain ] [Trk]OFF Shtl VTRA 1

FRM1A 2

V

RETR

[ ]MENU 1

A

Set

01 99

MENU Set 2[ I-Gain ]

C3-6

[ I-Gain ]

C2-14

2.4 ON/OFF

ON/OFF

1

2

4

3

[ I-Gain ] [Trk]OFF Shtl VTRA 1

FRM1A 2

V

RETR

[ ]MENU 1

Set

Set

[Trk]OFF

[Trk]ON

[ I-Gain ] [Trk]OFF Shtl VTRA 1

FRM1A 2

V

RETR

[ ]MENU 1

[ I-Gain ] [Trk]ON Shtl VTRA 1

FRM1A 2

V

RETR

[ ]MENU 1

Top

(D)

(D)

Set

OFF ON

MENU Set[Trk]OFF

2.4 ON/OFF

C2-5 C3-4

[Trk]

C2-15

2.5 AUX1

AUX1

Set

1

2

Set4

3

[ I-Gain ] [Trk]OFF Shtl VTRA 1

FRM1A 2

V

RETR

[ ]MENU 1

[ I-Gain ] [Trk]OFF Shtl VTRA 1

FRM1A 2

V

RETR

[ ]MENU 1

ShtlA 1

VTRA 1

[ I-Gain ] [Trk]OFF VTR VTRA 1

FRM1A 2

V

RETR

[ ]MENU 1

Top

Set2

Shtl(D) NON VTR RET FRM1 FRM2 Sped

MENU SetShtlA 1

2.5 AUX1 A 1

C2-5 C3-4

C2-16

2.6 VTR

VTR

Set

1

2

Set4

[ I-Gain ] [Trk]OFF Shtl VTRA 1

FRM1A 2

V

RETR

[ ]MENU 1

[ I-Gain ] [Trk]OFF Shtl VTRA 1

FRM1A 2

V

RETR

[ ]MENU 1

[ I-Gain ] [Trk]OFF Shtl RETA 1

FRM1A 2

V

RETR

[ ]MENU 1

VTRV

RETV

3

Top

2 Set

(D) ShtlVTR RET FRM1 FRM2 Sped

MENU SetVTRV

2.6 VTR V

C2-5 C3-4

C2-17

2.7 AUX2

AUX2

Set

1

2

[ I-Gain ] [Trk]OFF Shtl VTRA 1

FRM1A 2

V

RETR

[ ]MENU 1

[ Frm1 ] [ Frm2 ]

Shtl VTRA 1

FRM1A 2

V

RETR

[ ]MENU 1

[ Frm1 ] [ Frm2 ]

Shtl VTRA 1

ShtlA 2

V

RETR

[ ]MENU 1

FRM1A 2

ShtlA 2

Set4

3

Top

3 SetMENU SetA 1 FRM1A 2

Shtl(D) NON VTR RETFRM1 FRM2 Sped

2.7 AUX2 A 2

C2-5 C3-4

C2-18

2.8 RET

RET

Set

1

2

Set4

[ I-Gain ] [Trk]OFF Shtl VTRA 1

FRM1A 2

V

RETR

[ ]MENU 1

RETR

FRM2R

1

[ Frm1 ] [ Frm2 ]

Shtl VTRA 1

FRM1A 2

V

RETR

[ ]MENU

1

[ Frm1 ] [ Frm2 ]

Shtl VTRA 1

FRM1A 2

V

FRM2R

[ ]MENU

3

Top

3 Set

(D) Shtl VTRRET FRM1 FRM2 Sped

MENU SetA 1 RETR

2.8 RET R

C2-5 C3-4

C2-19

2.9 Frame Preset1 - Frame Preset1

(1)Frame Preset1

PRE C3-42

1

2

3

4

Top

A

[ I-Gain ] [Trk]OFF Shtl VTRA 1

FRM1A 2

V

RETR

[ ]MENU 1

Set

Set

1

[ I-Tq ] H [ Z.M. ] [ Frm1 ] [ Frm2 ]

FRM1A 2 RETR

[ ]MENU

Frame1: Preset

PRE

Focus: OFF Zoom: ON

Frame1: Preset

FAST

Focus: OFF Zoom: ON

"R"

(D)

Set

PRE FAST

MENU Set4 [ Frm1 ]

2.9 Frame Preset1 [ Frm1 ]

C2-5 C3-4

C2-20

2.9 Frame Preset1 - Frame Preset1 ON/OFF

(2)Frame Preset1 ON/OFF

1

2

3

4

5

Top

[ I-Gain ] [Trk]OFF Shtl VTRA 1

FRM1A 2

V

RETR

[ ]MENU 1

Frame1: PRE

Focus: OFF Zoom: ON

Preset

Frame1: PRE

Focus: OFF Zoom: OFF

Preset

A

Set

Set

1

[ I-Tq ] H [ Z.M. ] [ Frm1 ] [ Frm2 ]

FRM1A 2 RETR

[ ]MENU

Frame1: Preset

PRE

Focus: OFF Zoom: ON "R"

(D)

Set

ON OFF

MENU Set4 [ Frm1 ]

[ Frm1 ]

C2-5 C3-4

C2-21

2.9 Frame Preset1 - Frame Preset1 ON/OFF A

(3)Frame Preset1 ON/OFF A

ARFocus

1

2

3

5

Top

A

[ I-Gain ] [Trk]OFF Shtl VTRA 1

FRM1A 2

V

RETR

[ ]MENU 1

Frame1: Preset

PRE

Focus: OFF Zoom: ON

Frame1: Preset

PRE

Focus: ON Zoom: ON

1

[ I-Tq ] H [ Z.M. ] [ Frm1 ] [ Frm2 ]

FRM1A 2 RETR

[ ]MENU

Set

Set

Frame1: Preset

PRE

Focus: OFF Zoom: ON

4

(D)

(D)

Set2

ONOFF

MENU Set4 [ Frm1 ]

[ Frm1 ]

C2-5 C3-4

ARFocus

C2-22

2.10 Frame Preset2 - Frame Preset2

(1) Frame Preset2

PRE C3-42

1

2

3

4

Top

A

[ I-Gain ] [Trk]OFF Shtl VTRA 1

FRM1A 2

V

RETR

[ ]MENU 1

1

[ I-Tq ] H [ Z.M. ] [ Frm1 ]

FRM1A 2 RETR

[ ]MENU

[ Frm2 ]

Set

Set

Frame2: Preset

PRE

Focus: OFF Zoom: ON

Frame2: Preset

FAST

Focus: OFF Zoom: ON

"R"

(D)

Set

PRE FAST

MENU Set4 [ Frm2 ]

2.10 Frame Preset2 [ Frm2 ]

C2-5 C3-4

C2-23

2.10 Frame Preset2 - Frame Preset2 ON/OFF

(2) Frame Preset2 ON/OFF

1

2

3

4

5

Top

[ I-Gain ] [Trk]OFF Shtl VTRA 1

FRM1A 2

V

RETR

[ ]MENU 1

Frame2: PRE

Focus: OFF Zoom: ON

Preset

Frame2: PRE

Focus: OFF Zoom: OFF

Preset

A

1

[ I-Tq ] H [ Z.M. ] [ Frm1 ]

FRM1A 2 RETR

[ ]MENU

[ Frm2 ]

Set

Set

Frame2: Preset

PRE

Focus: OFF Zoom: ON

"R"

(D)

Set

ON OFF

MENU Set4 [ Frm2 ]

[ Frm2 ]

C2-5 C3-4

C2-24

2.10 Frame Preset2 - Frame Preset2 ON/OFF A

(3) Frame Preset2 ON/OFF A

ARFocus

1

2

3

5

Top

A

[ I-Gain ] [Trk]OFF Shtl VTRA 1

FRM1A 2

V

RETR

[ ]MENU 1

Frame2: Preset

PRE

Focus: OFF Zoom: ON

Frame2: Preset

PRE

Focus: ON Zoom: ON

Set

Set

Frame2: Preset

PRE

Focus: OFF Zoom: ON

4

1

[ I-Tq ] H [ Z.M. ] [ Frm1 ]

FRM1A 2 RETR

[ ]MENU

[ Frm2 ]

(D)

Set

ONOFF

MENU Set4 [ Frm2 ] 2

[ Frm2 ]

C2-5 C3-4

C2-25

2.11

[ I-Gain ] [Trk]OFF Shtl VTRA 1

FRM1A 2

V

RETR

[ ]MENU 1

2 Set

4 Set

1

[ Frm1 ] [ Frm2 ] [ ]MENU 1

NormAM Zoom [ Z.M. ][ I-Tq ] H

[ Frm1 ] [ Frm2 ] [ ]MENU 1

NormAM Zoom [ Z.M. ][ I-Tq ] L

[ I-Tq ] H

[ I-Tq ] L

3

Top

(D)

Set

H L

MENU Set5 [ I-Tq ] H

2.11 [ I-Tq ]

C2-5 C3-4

C2-26

2.12 -

(1)

2

4

CurveMode

A

3

5

[ I-Tq ] H [ Frm1 ] [ Frm2 ]

[ ]MENU 1

NormAM

[ Z.M. ] Zoom

[ I-Gain ] [Trk]OFF Shtl VTRA 1

FRM1A 2

V

RETR

[ ]MENU 1

Set

Set

CurveMode Zoom

Demand: Seesaw: 5

5

[ ]

CurveMode Zoom

Demand: Seesaw:

[ ]

D5 5

CurveMode Zoom

Demand: Seesaw:

[ ]

3 5

A

Top

CurveMode

1

[ Z.M. ]MENU Set Set5

1 2 3 4 D5 6 7 8 9

(1)

(9)

MAX

2.12 [ Z.M. ]

C2-5 C3-4

C2-27

2.12 -

(2)

2

4

CurveMode

A

3

5

CurveMode Zoom

Demand: Seesaw:

[ ]

[ I-Tq ] H [ Frm1 ] [ Frm2 ]

[ ]MENU 1

NormAM

[ Z.M. ]

1

Zoom

[ I-Gain ] [Trk]OFF Shtl VTRA 1

FRM1A 2

V

RETR

[ ]MENU 1

Set

Set

CurveMode Zoom

Demand: Seesaw: 5

5

[ ]

CurveMode Zoom

Demand: Seesaw:

[ ]

D5

8 5

5

A

CurveMode

Top

[ Z.M. ] 2 SetMENU Set

1 2 3 4 D5 6 7 8 9

5

(1)

(9)

MAX

[ Z.M. ]

C2-5 C3-4

C2-28

2.13 A/M

A/M

[ I-Gain ] [Trk]OFF Shtl VTRA 1

FRM1A 2

V

RETR

[ ]MENU 1

NormAM

ReveAM

Set

1

2

Set4

3

Top

[ Frm1 ] [ Frm2 ] [ ]MENU 1

Zoom [ Z.M. ][ I-Tq ] H

NormAM

[ Frm1 ] [ Frm2 ] [ ]MENU 1

Zoom [ Z.M. ][ I-Tq ] H

ReveAM

(D)

Set

Norm Reve

A Auto / M Manual A Manual / M Auto A Auto / M Auto A Manual / M Manual

Auto Manu

Auto Only Manual Only

MENU Set6 NormAM

2.13 A/M AM

C2-5 C3-4

C2-29

2.14

ZoomIris

1

2 MANUAL

3 TELE OPEN WIDE CLOSE

4 C3-59

[ I-Gain ] [Trk]OFF Shtl VTRA 1

FRM1A 2

V

RETR

[ ]MENU 1

Zoom

Iris

Set

1

2

Set4

3

Top

[ I-Tq ] H [ Frm1 ] [ Frm2 ]

[ ]MENU 1

NormAM Zoom [ Z.M. ]

[ I-Tq ] H [ Frm1 ] [ Frm2 ]

[ ]MENU 1

NormAM Iris [ Z.M. ]

(D)

Set

Zoom Iris

MENU Set6 Zoom

2.14

C2-5 C3-4

C3-1

3 MENU

C3-2

3.1 MENU

3.1 MENU

[ I-Gain ] [Trk]OFF Shtl VTRA 1

FRM1A 2

V

RETR

[ ]MENU 1 [ ] A I G : 5 0

Iris [ ] [ I-Gain ] Torque: High Comp: ON

Fol. Iris: Zoom: Focus:

0940 0527

0011

1

Switch 1

VTR:V

A 1

AUX2:A 2

VTR

AUX1: FRM1 ShtlNo. :

User 1

Name: ResetAll

1

Frame1: Preset

PRE Frame2: PRE ZSpeed: 800

: Go Top : BackSet

Set

Set

Set

1 2

3

4

56

7

8

C3-27

C3-51

C3-67 C3-35

C3-65

C3-31

2

3

5

6

7

C3-454 C3-758

Tracking: F-Hold: OFF

OFF

Movement

Zoom [ ] CurveMode

Focus [ ]

Info Encoder: Initialize

OFF

(A)

(A )

(0 9)

(0 9)

CamSeri: ON

MENU 33 3

MENU User Switch Preset Iris Zoom

Focus A Info Fol. 8R 7

Top MENU Set User

7

MENU 8

Top Top

C3-3

3.2 User

3.2 User

User 1 9

9 User 1 9

User 0

User1 9User A

User 0

C3-26 User 0

F-Hold

User A ( )

( )

,

VTRRETIRIS A/MIRIS INST

AUX1AUX2MEMO

C3-19 C3-25

(User 0 9) ....................................................C3-4

.....................................................................C3-5

(1) .....................................................C3-6

(2) .....................................................C3-7

.............................................C3-8

(1) ....................................C3-10

(2) ....................................C3-12

(3) ......................................................C3-14

(User 0 9) ....................................................C3-15

(User A) .........................................................C3-19

(User A) .........................................................C3-23

......................................................................C3-26

Top

Top Top

Top

Top

C3-4

3.2 User - (User 0 9)

(User 0 9)

Top

User

2

[ I-Gain ] [Trk]OFF Shtl VTRA 1

FRM1A 2

V

RETR

[ ]MENU 1

3

1 Set

No. : User

1 Name: ResetAll

1

No. : User

Name: ResetAll

1 1

No. : User

Name: ResetAll

2 2

SetMENU Set User 1

0 (D)1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 A

User 0 9User AUser A

C3-19 C3-25 User No.

Top

C3-5

3.2 User -

2

3

[ I-Gain ] [Trk]OFF Shtl VTRA 1

FRM1A 2

V

RETR

[ ]MENU 1

1 Set

Set

Name User

Name:

1

Set5

Name User

Name: A

1

No. : User

1 Name: ResetAll

1

No. : User

Name: ResetAll

1 1

No. : User

Name: ResetAll

1 1

A

Top

User

Name

4

SetMENU Set User 1 Set2

(D) A B C D E F G H I J K L M N O P Q R S T U V W X Y Z a b c d e f g h i j k l m n o p q r s t u v w x y z 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9

C2-5 C3-4

Top

C3-6

3.2 User -

2

3

4

[ I-Gain ] [Trk]OFF Shtl VTRA 1

FRM1A 2

V

RETR

[ ]MENU 1

Name: User

ResetAll Copy

1

User 1 Reset Now.

ResetAll User

User: AllUser:

1

y/n y/n

Name: User

ResetAll Copy

1

1 Set

Set

Set6

Reset

5

No. : User

1 Name: ResetAll

1

ResetAll User

User: AllUser:

1

y/n y/n

ResetAll User

User: AllUser:

1

y/n y/n

A

A

Top

User

Reset

Reset

Reset

SetMENU Set User 1 Set3

(1)

1 5

F-Hold

C2-5 C3-4

C3-7

3.2 User -

2

3

4

[ I-Gain ] [Trk]OFF Shtl VTRA 1

FRM1A 2

V

RETR

[ ]MENU 1

Name: User

ResetAll Copy

1

All User Reset Now.

ResetAll User

User: AllUser:

1

y/n y/n

Name: User

ResetAll Copy

1

ResetAll User

User: AllUser:

1

y/n y/n

1 Set

Set

Set6

5

No. : User

1 Name: ResetAll

1

A

A

Top

User

Reset

Reset

Reset

ResetAll User

User: AllUser:

1

y/n y/n

SetMENU Set User 1 Set3 2

(2)

1 5

F-Hold

C3-8

3.2 User -

3

6

5

[ I-Gain ] [Trk]OFF Shtl VTRA 1

FRM1A 2

V

RETR

[ ]MENU 1

Copy User

To No. : Copy:

1

y/n 1

Copy User

To No. : Copy:

1

y/n 3

Copy User

To No. : Copy:

1

3 y/n

ResetAll User

Copy ToOtherLens

1

Copy User

To No. : Copy:

1

1 y/n

1 Set

2

4

Set

No. : User

1 Name: ResetAll

1

Top

User

A

Copy

1 7

C2-5 C3-4

C3-9

3.2 User -

Set

MENU Set User 1 Set4

ResetAll User

Copy ToOtherLens

1

Set8 A

7

Copy User

To No. : Copy:

1

3 y/n

C3-10

3.2 User -

C3-

12

(1)

3

[ I-Gain ] [Trk]OFF Shtl VTRA 1

FRM1A 2

V

RETR

[ ]MENU 1

ToOtherLens User

Connect:

1

y/n

ToOtherLens User

Connect:

1

y/n

ToOtherLens User

Connect:

1

y/n

1 Set

2

4

Set

Set

5

No. : User

1 Name: ResetAll

1

Top

User

A

ResetAll User

Copy ToOtherLens

1

B

ToOtherLens

ToOtherLens User

UserCopy : AllCopy :

1

y/n y/n

6

7

1 12

1.20P-20P20

2.

3.

C2-5 C3-4

C3-11

3.2 User -

Set

SetMENU

Set

Set User 1 Set5

8

ToOtherLens User

To No. : Copy:

1

1 y/n

10

ToOtherLens User

To No. : Copy:

1

y/n 1

ToOtherLens User

To No. : Copy:

1

y/n 3

11

9

Set13

12

Now Data Copy Please Wait...

ResetAll User

Copy ToOtherLens

1

A

Set

ToOtherLens User

To No. : Copy:

1

y/n 3

ToOtherLens User

To No. : Copy:

1

y/n 3

2

1

ToOtherLens User

UserCopy : AllCopy :

1

y/n y/n

*1 Set

*2

C3-14 (3)

C3-12

3.2 User -

(2)

3

[ I-Gain ] [Trk]OFF Shtl VTRA 1

FRM1A 2

V

RETR

[ ]MENU 1

ResetAll User

Copy ToOtherLens

1

ToOtherLens User

Connect:

1

y/n

ToOtherLens User

Connect:

1

y/n

ToOtherLens User

Connect:

1

y/n

1 Set

2

Set

4

Set

No. : User

1 Name: ResetAll

1

Top

User

A

ToOtherLens

5

6

110

1. 20P-20P20

2.

3.

C3-13

3.2 User -

Set

B

y/n

9

ToOtherLens User

ToAllUser Copy:

1

y/n

AllCopy

Set11

10

Now Data Copy Please Wait...

A ResetAll

User

Copy ToOtherLens

1

A

7

ToOtherLens User

ToAllUser Copy:

1

y/n

ToOtherLens User

ToAllUser Copy:

1

y/n

2

1

8

ToOtherLens User

UserCopy : AllCopy :

1

y/n y/n

ToOtherLens User

UserCopy : AllCopy :

1

y/n

Set

SetMENU Set User 1 Set

Set

5

2

*1 Set

*2

C3-14 (3)

C3-14

3.2 User -

(3)

Lens Connect Error!!

Copy Error!!

User Copy ToOtherLens

1

A

Access: Unlock

C3-15

3.2 User - (User 0 9)

C3-19 C3-22

Lock

[ I-Gain ] [Trk]OFF Shtl VTRA 1

FRM1A 2

V

RETR

[ ]MENU 1

2

No. : User

1 Name: ResetAll

1

Top

User

User Copy ToOtherLens

1

Access: Unlock Set3

Set1

Unlock Lock

[ ] Lock [ I-Gain ] [Trk]OFF

Shtl VTRA 1

FRM1A 2

V

RETR

[ ]MENU 1 [ I-Gain ] [Trk]OFF

Shtl VTRA 1

FRM1A 2

V

RETR

MENU

(User 0 9)

Lock Unlock

8

Lock

(ShtlShot FramePreset PresetSpeed)

ZoomTrack ON/OFF

AutoIrisGain

F-Hold

User No. 0 9 Unlock

User No. Lock Lock

C3-16

3.2 User - (User 0 9)

SetSet Set Set6 DISPLAY

(D) Unlock Lock

(D) A B C D E F G H I J K L M N O P Q R S T U V W X Y Z a b c d e f g h i j k l m n o p q r s t u v w x y z 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9

Set

Set

4

EnterPassword

EnterPassword

Lock OK? y/n

5

6

User Copy

1

ToOtherLens Access: Lock

Lock Unlock

8

C3-17

3.2 User - (User 0 9)

Unlock

Unlock

Unlock 1

Set Set[ ] Lock

(D) Unlock Lock

2

[ ] 1

Top

1 MENU

MENU [ I-Gain ] [Trk]OFF

Shtl VTRA 1

FRM1A 2

V

RETR

[ ] Lock

MENU [ I-Gain ] [Trk]OFF

Shtl VTRA 1

FRM1A 2

V

RETR

Set

Set

EnterPassword

EnterPassword

Unlock OK? y/n

5

6

3

Set4

[ I-Gain ] [Trk]OFF Shtl VTRA 1

FRM1A 2

V

RETR

MENU

[ I-Gain ] [Trk]OFF Shtl VTRA 1

FRM1A 2

V

RETR

[ ] Lock

[ ] Lock

C3-18

3.2 User - (User 0 9)

[ I-Gain ] [Trk]OFF Shtl VTRA 1

FRM1A 2

V

RETR

MENU [ ] Lock

2

No. : User

1 Name: ResetAll

1

Top

User 1 Set

1

1

User Copy ToOtherLens Access: Lock

Set3

Set

Set

4

EnterPassword

EnterPassword

Unlock OK? y/n

5

6

User Copy ToOtherLens Access: Unlock

Unlock 2

SetSet Set Set6 DISPLAY

C3-19

3.2 User - (User A)

User A ( )

( )

VTRRETIRIS A/MIRIS INST

AUX1AUX2MEMO

Unlock

(User A)

Lock Unlock

8

Top

[ ] A I G : 5 0 I G : 5 0 [ ] Lock

C3-20

3.2 User - (User A)

(1)

Top

User

2

[ I-Gain ] [Trk]OFF Shtl VTRA 1

FRM1A 2

V

RETR

[ ]MENU 1

3

[ ] A I G : 5 0

AnalogMode Lock / Unlock

1 Set

4 Set

5 Set

6

No. : User

1 Name: ResetAll

1

No. : User

Name: ResetAll

1 1

No. : User

Name: ResetAll

A A

SetMENU SetSet User 1

0 (D)1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 A

C3-21

3.2 User - (User A)

(2)

Top

User

2

[ I-Gain ] [Trk]OFF Shtl VTRA 1

FRM1A 2

V

RETR

[ ]MENU 1

3

EnterPassword

Set6

AnalogMode Lock / Unlock

Set5

EnterPassword

Lock OK? y/n

1 Set

4 Set

No. : User

1 Name: ResetAll

1

No. : User

Name: ResetAll

1 1

No. : User

Name: ResetAll

A A

C3-22

3.2 User - (User A)

8 [ ] LockI G : 5 0

Set7

Set Set DISPLAY

(D) Unlock Lock

0 (D)1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 A

SetMENU SetSet User 1

(D) A B C D E F G H I J K L M N O P Q R S T U V W X Y Z a b c d e f g h i j k l m n o p q r s t u v w x y z 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9

Lock Unlock

8

C3-23

3.2 User - (User A)

[ ] A I G : 5 0 I G : 5 0 [ ] Lock

Unlock

(1)

1 Set

[ ] A

3 Set

2

I G : 50

I G : 55

[ ] A

I G : 5 0

I G : 5 5

SetSet

01 99

I G : 5 0

User A ( )

( )

VTRRETIRIS A/MIRIS INST

AUX1AUX2MEMO

(User A) Top

C3-24

3.2 User - (User A)

(2)

1 Set

[ ] A I G : 5 0

[ ] A I G : 5 0

3 Set

2

[ I-Gain ] [Trk]OFF Shtl VTRA 1

FRM1A 2

V

RETR

[ ]MENU 0

[ I-Gain ] [Trk]OFF Shtl VTRA 1

FRM1A 2

V

RETR

[ ]MENU 0

I :

(Unlock )

SetSet I G : 5 0

C3-25

3.2 User - (User A)

1 Set

[ ] Lock I G : 5 0

[ ] Lock I G : 5 0

2

I :

EnterPassword

Set3

Set4

Set

Set

5

EnterPassword

Unlock OK? y/n

[ ] A I G : 5 0

[ ] A I G : 5 0

6

[ I-Gain ] [Trk]OFF Shtl VTRA 1

FRM1A 2

V

RETR

[ ]MENU 1

(Lock )

Set Set Set Set

Set

(D)

I G : 5 0

(D) A B C D E F G H I J K L M N O P Q R S T U V W X Y Z a b c d e f g h i j k l m n o p q r s t u v w x y z 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9

1 Set

2

User 0 Reset Now

Escape To User 0 Top

[ I-Gain ] [Trk]OFF Shtl VTRA 1

FRM1A 2

V

RETR

[ ]MENU 1

[ I-Gain ] [Trk]OFF Shtl VTRA 1

FRM1A 2

V

RETR

[ ]MENU 0

SetandDISPLAY[ ]

User 0 9 User A User0

(1) User 0 9

(2) User A ( )

1 Set

2

Escape To User 0 Top

[ I-Gain ] [Trk]OFF Shtl VTRA 1

FRM1A 2

V

RETR

[ ]MENU 0

[ ] A I G : 5 0

3.2 User -

C3-26

F-Hold

Lock

C3-27

AUX1 ......................................................... C3-28

AUX2 ......................................................... C3-29

VTR .......................................................... C3-30

RET .......................................................... C3-31

A/M .......................................................... C3-32

.......................................................... C3-33

Top Top.

Top

Top

Top

Top

Top

Top

3.3.Switch

3.3.Switch

C3-28

3.3.Switch - AUX1

Shtl(D) NON VTR RET FRM1 FRM2 Sped

MENU Set Switch 1

2

3

[ I-Gain ] [Trk]OFF Shtl VTRA 1

FRM1A 2

V

RETR

[ ]MENU 1

1 SetSwitch

Top

Switch 1

VTR:V VTR

AUX1:A 1

AUX2:A 2 FRM1 Shtl

Switch 1

VTR:V VTR

AUX1:A 1

AUX2:A 2 FRM1 VTR

Switch 1

VTR:V

A 1

AUX2:A 2

VTR

AUX1: FRM1 Shtl

AUX1.

AUX1

C2-5.C3-4.

Top

C3-29

3.3.Switch - AUX2

[ I-Gain ] [Trk]OFF Shtl VTRA 1

FRM1A 2

V

RETR

[ ]MENU 1

2

3

1 SetSwitch

Top

Switch 1

VTR:V

A 1

AUX2:A 2

VTR

AUX1: FRM1 Shtl

Switch 1

VTR:V VTR

AUX1:A 1

AUX2:A 2

Shtl FRM1

Switch 1

VTR:V VTR

AUX1:A 1

AUX2:A 2

Shtl Sped

Shtl(D) NON VTR RETFRM1 FRM2 Sped

2MENU Set Switch 1

AUX2

AUX2 Top

C2-5.C3-4.

C3-30

3.3.Switch - VTR

[ I-Gain ] [Trk]OFF Shtl VTRA 1

FRM1A 2

V

RETR

[ ]MENU 1

Switch 1

RET:R RET

AUX2:A 2

VTR:V

FRM1 VTR

Switch 1

RET:R RET

AUX2:A 2

VTR:V

FRM1 RET

2

3

1 SetSwitch

Top

Switch 1

VTR:V

A 1

AUX2:A 2

VTR

AUX1: FRM1 Shtl

3MENU Set Switch 1

(D) ShtlVTR RET FRM1 FRM2 Sped

VTR

VTR Top

C2-5.C3-4.

C3-31

3.3.Switch - RET

[ I-Gain ] [Trk]OFF Shtl VTRA 1

FRM1A 2

V

RETR

[ ]MENU 1

2

3

1 SetSwitch

Top

Switch 1

A/M:AM Normal

VTR:V

RET:R

VTR RET

Switch 1

A/M:AM Normal

VTR:V

RET:R

VTR Sped

Switch 1

VTR:V

A 1

AUX2:A 2

VTR

AUX1: FRM1 Shtl

4MENU Set Switch 1

(D) Shtl VTRRET FRM1 FRM2 Sped

RET

RET Top

C2-5.C3-4.

C3-32

3.3.Switch - A/M

[ I-Gain ] [Trk]OFF Shtl VTRA 1

FRM1A 2

V

RETR

[ ]MENU 1

Switch 1

SSaw: A/M:AM

RET:R RET

Zoom Normal

Switch 1

SSaw: A/M:AM

RET:R RET

Zoom Revers

2

3

1 SetSwitch

Top

Switch 1

VTR:V

A 1

AUX2:A 2

VTR

AUX1: FRM1 Shtl

5MENU Set Switch 1

(D)Normal Revers Auto Manual

A/M

A/M Top

C2-5.C3-4.

C3-33

3.3.Switch -

[ I-Gain ] [Trk]OFF Shtl VTRA 1

FRM1A 2

V

RETR

[ ]MENU 1

Switch 1

SSaw: A/M:AM

RET:R RET Normal

Zoom

Switch 1

SSaw: A/M:AM

RET:R RET Normal

Iris

2

3

1 SetSwitch

Top

Switch 1

VTR:V

A 1

AUX2:A 2

VTR

AUX1: FRM1 Shtl

6MENU Set Switch 1

(D)Zoom Iris

ZoomIris

1.

2. MANUAL

AUTO/REMOTE

3. TELE OPEN WIDE CLOSE

4. C3-59.

Top

C2-5.C3-4.

C3-35

Frame Preset1 ..............................................C3-36

Frame Preset1 ON/OFF ...........................................C3-37

Frame Preset1 ON/OFF A .......................C3-38

Frame Preset2 ...............................................C3-39

Frame Preset2 ON/OFF ............................................C3-40

Frame Preset2 ON/OFF A ........................C3-41

.......................................................C3-42

.......................................................C3-43

.....................................................C3-44

Top Top

Top

Top

Top

Top

Top

Top

3.4 Preset

3.4 Preset

C3-36

3.4 Preset - Frame Preset1

2

3

4

5

[ I-Gain ] [Trk]OFF Shtl VTRA 1

FRM1A 2

V

RETR

[ ]MENU 1

Top

A

A

Frame1

"R"

1 Set

Set

Set

Frame1

Frame1: Preset

PRE Frame2: PRE ZSpeed: 800

Frame1: Preset

FAST Frame2: PRE ZSpeed: 800

Frame1: Preset

PRE

Focus: OFF Zoom: ON

Frame1: Preset

FAST

Focus: OFF Zoom: ON

Frame1: Preset

PRE Frame2: PRE ZSpeed: 800

(D)PRE FAST

Set Set2 PresetMENU Set

PRE C3-42

Frame Preset1

C2-5 C3-4

Top

C3-37

3.4 Preset - Frame Preset1 ON/OFF

2

3

[ I-Gain ] [Trk]OFF Shtl VTRA 1

FRM1A 2

V

RETR

[ ]MENU 1

Frame1: PRE

Focus: OFF Zoom: ON

Preset

Frame1: PRE

Focus: OFF Zoom: OFF

Preset

1 Set

Set

Frame1: Preset

PRE Frame2: PRE ZSpeed: 800

Frame1: Preset

FAST Frame2: PRE ZSpeed: 800

Frame1: Preset

PRE Frame2: PRE ZSpeed: 800

4

5

Top

A

A

Frame1

Set

Frame1 "R"

(D)

Set Set2 PresetMENU Set

ON OFF

Frame Preset1 ON/OFF Top

C2-5 C3-4

C3-38

3.4 Preset - Frame Preset1 ON/OFF A

[ I-Gain ] [Trk]OFF Shtl VTRA 1

FRM1A 2

V

RETR

[ ]MENU 1

Frame1: Preset

PRE Frame2: PRE ZSpeed: 800

Frame1: Preset

FAST Frame2: PRE ZSpeed: 800

Frame1: Preset

PRE

Focus: OFF Zoom: ON

Frame1: Preset

PRE

Focus: ON Zoom: ON

Frame1: Preset

PRE Frame2: PRE ZSpeed: 800

2

3

1 Set

Set

4

5

Top

A

A

Frame1

Set

Frame1

(D)

Set Set2 2PresetMENU Set

OFF ON

ARFocus

Frame Preset1 ON/OFF A Top

C2-5 C3-4

C3-39

3.4 Preset - Frame Preset2

[ ]

2

3

4

5

[ I-Gain ] [Trk]OFF Shtl VTRA 1

FRM1A 2

V

RETR

[ ]MENU 1

Top

A

A

Frame2

Frame1: Preset

PRE Frame2: ZSpeed: 800

PRE

Frame1: Preset

PRE Frame2: ZSpeed: 800

FAST

1 Set

Set

Set

Frame2

Frame2: Preset

PRE

Focus: OFF Zoom: ON

Frame2: Preset

FAST

Focus: OFF Zoom: ON

Frame1: Preset

PRE Frame2: PRE ZSpeed: 800

"R"

(D)PRE FAST

Set Set2 2PresetMENU Set

PRE C3-42

Frame Preset2 Top

C2-5 C3-4

C3-40

3.4 Preset - Frame Preset2 ON/OFF

Frame Preset2 ON/OFF

2

3

[ I-Gain ] [Trk]OFF Shtl VTRA 1

FRM1A 2

V

RETR

[ ]MENU 1

Frame2: PRE

Focus: OFF Zoom: ON

Preset

Frame2: PRE

Focus: OFF Zoom: OFF

Preset

1 Set

Set

Frame1: Preset

PRE Frame2: PRE ZSpeed: 800

4

5

Top

A

A

Frame2

Set

Frame2

Frame1: Preset

PRE Frame2: ZSpeed: 800

PRE

Frame1: Preset

PRE Frame2: ZSpeed: 800

PRE

"R"

(D)

Set Set2 2PresetMENU Set

ON OFF

Top

C2-5 C3-4

C3-41

3.4 Preset - Frame Preset2 ON/OFF A

[ I-Gain ] [Trk]OFF Shtl VTRA 1

FRM1A 2

V

RETR

[ ]MENU 1

Frame2: Preset

PRE

Focus: OFF Zoom: ON

Frame2: Preset

PRE

Focus: ON Zoom: ON

Frame1: Preset

PRE Frame2: PRE ZSpeed: 800

2

3

1 Set

Set

4

5

Top

A

A

Frame2

Set

Frame2

Frame1: Preset

PRE Frame2: ZSpeed: 800

PRE

Frame1: Preset

PRE Frame2: ZSpeed: 800

PRE

(D)

Set Set2 2 2PresetMENU Set

OFF ON

ARFocus

Frame Preset2 ON/OFF A Top

C2-5 C3-4

C3-42

3.4 Preset -

2

3

[ I-Gain ] [Trk]OFF Shtl VTRA 1

FRM1A 2

V

RETR

[ ]MENU 1

1 Set

Frame2: Preset

PRE ZSpeed: ZMovement

800

Frame2: Preset

PRE ZSpeed: ZMovement

500

Frame1: Preset

PRE Frame2: PRE ZSpeed: 800

Top

(D)

2 3PresetMENU Set

001 800

Memo

Frame1Frame2

C2-5 C3-4

C3-43

3.4 Preset -

2

3

4

6

[ I-Gain ] [Trk]OFF Shtl VTRA 1

FRM1A 2

V

RETR

[ ]MENU 1

Frame2: Preset

PRE ZSpeed: ZMovement

800

Preset ZMovement

Stop: Start: 99

91

Preset ZMovement

Stop: Start: D99

91

Preset ZMovement

Stop: Start: 50

91

5

1 Set

Set

Set

Frame1: Preset

PRE Frame2: PRE ZSpeed: 800

Top

A

ZMovement

ZMovement

(D)

2 4PresetMENU Set Set Set

00 99

C2-5 C3-4

C3-44

[ I-Gain ] [Trk]OFF Shtl VTRA 1

FRM1A 2

V

RETR

[ ]MENU 1

Frame2: Preset

PRE ZSpeed: ZMovement

800

Preset ZMovement

Stop: Start: 99

91

Frame1: Preset

PRE Frame2: PRE ZSpeed: 800

Preset ZMovement

Stop: Start: 99

D91

Preset ZMovement

Stop: Start: 99

70

2

3

4

6

5

1 Set

Set

Set

Top

A

ZMovement ZMovement

91

2 24PresetMENU Set Set Set

00 99

3.4 Preset -

C2-5 C3-4

C3-45

(1) .....................................................C3-46

(2) .......................................................C3-47

.............................................................C3-48

ON/OFF .........................................................C3-49

ON/OFF .....................................................C3-50

Top Top

Top

Top

Top

3.5 Iris

3.5 Iris

C3-46

3.5 Iris -

(1)

Iris

Top

Iris

[I-Gain]

6

[ I-Gain ] [Trk]OFF Shtl VTRA 1

FRM1A 2

V

RETR

[ ]MENU 1

1

4

Set

3

Set

Set

[ I-Gain ] Iris

Remote: 90 Auto: 52

[ ]

[ I-Gain ] Iris

Remote: 90 Auto: 55

[ ]

5

[I-Gain]

2

Iris [ ] [ I-Gain ] Torque: High Comp: ON

[ I-Gain ] Iris

Remote: 90 Auto: 52

[ ]

A

[ I-Gain ] Iris

Comp: ON Torque: High

[ ]

Set Set2 3 SetMENU

01 99

Iris [ ]

--> A/M

AUTO

-->

Remote

hunt-

ing

C3-6

Top

C3-47

3.5 Iris -

Iris

Top

Iris

[I-Gain]

6

[ I-Gain ] [Trk]OFF Shtl VTRA 1

FRM1A 2

V

RETR

[ ]MENU 1

1

4

Set

3

Set

Set

52

5

[ I-Gain ] Iris

Remote: 90 Auto:

[ ]

[ I-Gain ] Iris

Remote: 93 Auto: 52

[ ]

[I-Gain]

2

Iris [ ] [ I-Gain ] Torque: High Comp: ON

[ I-Gain ] Iris

Remote: 90 Auto: 52

[ ]

A

[ I-Gain ] Iris

Comp: ON Torque: High

[ ]

Set Set2 3 2 SetMENU

90

01 99

Iris [ ]

(2)

--> A/M

AUTO

-->

Remote

C3-6

C3-48

3.5 Iris -

Iris

Top

Iris

[ I-Gain ] [Trk]OFF A 1

A 2

V

[ ]MENU 1

Shtl VTR FRM1 RETR

1

3

Set

2

[ I-Gain ] Iris [ ]

Torque: Comp: ON

High

[ I-Gain ] Iris [ ]

Torque: Comp: ON

Low

Iris [ ] [ I-Gain ] Torque: High Comp: ON

High Low

Set 2 3 2

(D)

MENU Iris [ ]

C2-5 C3-4

Top

C3-49

3.5 Iris - ON/OFF

ON/OFF

Iris

Top

Iris

[ -Gain ] [Trk]OFF A 1

A 2

V

[ ]MENU 1

Shtl VTR FRM1 RETR

1

3

Set

2

Iris [ ] [ I-Gain ] Torque: High Comp: ON

Iris [ ]

Comp: Close: OFF

Torque: High ON

Iris [ ]

Comp: Torque: High

OFF

ON OFF

Set 2 3 3

(D)

MENU Iris [ ]

2.0x 2F

ON2.0x

ON/OFF ON

C2-5 C3-4

C3-50

Iris

Top

Iris

[ I-Gain ] [Trk]OFF Shtl VTRA 1

FRM1A 2

V

RETR

[ ]MENU 1

1

3

Set

2

Iris [ ] [ I-Gain ] Torque: High Comp: ON

Iris [ ]

Comp: Torque: High

ON Close: OFF

Iris [ ]

Comp: Close:

Torque: High ON ON

OFF ON

Set 2 3 4

(D)

MENU Iris [ ]

ON2.0x

ON

OFF

3.5 Iris - ON/OFF

ON/OFF

C2-5 C3-4

C3-51

ON/OFF ........................................................... C3-52

F-Hold ON/OFF ............................................................ C3-53

.......................................................... C3-54

.......................................................... C3-55

...................................................... C3-56

............................................................ C3-57

.................................................. C3-58

...................................................... C3-59

...................................................... C3-60

.................................................... C3-61

/...................................... C3-62

........................................................ C3-63

Top Top.

Top

Top

Top

3.6.Zoom

3.6.Zoom

C3-52

3.6.Zoom - ON/OFF

Zoom

Top

Zoom

3

[ I-Gain ] [Trk]OFF A 1

A 2

V

[ ]MENU 1

Shtl VTR FRM1 RETR

1 Set

2

Tracking: F-Hold: OFF

OFF

Movement

Zoom [ ]

Tracking F-Hold: Movement

Zoom [ ] OFF OFF

Tracking F-Hold: Movement

Zoom [ ] ON OFF

(D) OFF ON

Set 2 4MENU Zoom [ ]

ON/OFF

C2-5. C3-4.

Top

C3-53

3.6.Zoom -.F-Hold ON/OFF

Zoom

Top

Zoom

3

[ I-Gain ] [Trk]OFF A 1

A 2

V

[ ]MENU 1

Shtl VTR FRM1 RETR

1 Set

2

Tracking F-Hold: Movement

Zoom [ ] OFF OFF

Tracking F-Hold: Movement

Zoom [ ] OFF ON

Tracking: F-Hold: OFF

OFF

Movement

Zoom [ ]

(D) OFF ON

Set 2 4 2MENU Zoom [ ]

F-Hold. /.

F-Hold.

0

F-Hold. C3-6

F-Hold. OFF F-Hold OFF

F-Hold ON

F-Hold ON/OFF

C3-54

3.6.Zoom -

Zoom

Top

Zoom

Movement

A

3

4

6

[ I-Gain ] [Trk]OFF A 1

A 2

V

[ ]MENU 1

Shtl VTR FRM1 RETR

5

1 Set

Set

Set

2

Movement

A

Movement Zoom

Stop: Start:

[ ]

99 91

Movement Zoom

Stop: Start:

[ ]

97 91

Movement Zoom

Stop: Start:

[ ]

D99 91

Tracking: F-Hold: OFF

OFF

OFF

Movement

Zoom [ ]

F-Hold: Movement CurveMode

Zoom [ ]

(D) 00 99

Set SetSet2 4 3MENU Zoom [ ]

C2-5. C3-4.

C3-55

3.6.Zoom -

Top

Movement 3

4

6

[ I-Gain ] [Trk]OFF A 1

A 2

V

[ ]MENU 1

Shtl VTR FRM1 RETR

5

1 Set

Set

Set

2

Movement Zoom

Stop: Start:

[ ]

99 91

Movement Zoom

End: Stop:

[ ]

D91 99

Movement Zoom

End: Stop:

[ ]

89 99

Tracking: F-Hold: OFF

OFF

OFF

Movement

Zoom [ ]

F-Hold: Movement CurveMode

Zoom [ ]

Zoom

A

Zoom

Movement

A

91

00 99

Set SetSet2 4 3 2MENU Zoom [ ]

C2-5. C3-4.

C3-56

3.6.Zoom -

Movement 3

4

6

[ I-Gain ] [Trk]OFF A 1

A 2

V

[ ]MENU 1

Shtl VTR FRM1 RETR

5

Zoom

A

Movement

A

Zoom

Top

1 Set

Set

Set

2

Movement Zoom

Stop: Start:

[ ]

99 91

Movement Zoom

End: Stop:

[ ]

D99 99

Movement Zoom

End: Stop:

[ ]

97 99

Tracking: F-Hold: OFF

OFF

OFF

Movement

Zoom [ ]

F-Hold: Movement CurveMode

Zoom [ ]

(D) 00 99

Set SetSet2 4 3 3MENU Zoom [ ]

C2-5. C3-4.

C3-57

3.6.Zoom -

CurveMode 3

4

6

[ I-Gain ] [Trk]OFF A 1

A 2

V

R

[ ]MENU 1

CurveMode Zoom

Demand: Seesaw:

[ ]

5 5

Shtl VTR FRM1 RET

5

Zoom

A

CurveMode

A

Zoom

Top

1 Set

Set

Set

2

Movement CurveMode SpeedAdj

Zoom [ ]

OFF

CurveMode Zoom

Demand: Seesaw:

[ ]

5

CurveMode Zoom

Demand: Seesaw:

[ ]

5

D5

7

Tracking: F-Hold: OFF

OFF

Movement

Zoom [ ]

1 2 3 4 D5 6 7 8 9

Set SetSet2 4 4MENU Zoom [ ]

(1)

(9)

MAX

Top

C2-5. C3-4.

C3-58

3.6.Zoom -

CurveMode 3

4

6

[ I-Gain ] [Trk]OFF A 1

A 2

V

R

[ ]MENU 1

CurveMode Zoom

Demand: Seesaw:

[ ]

5 5

Shtl VTR FRM1 RET

5

1 Set

Set

Set

2

Movement CurveMode SpeedAdj

Zoom [ ]

OFF

CurveMode Zoom

Demand: Seesaw:

[ ]

5

CurveMode Zoom

Demand: Seesaw:

[ ]

5

D5

7

Tracking: F-Hold: OFF

OFF

Movement

Zoom [ ] Zoom

A

CurveMode

A

Zoom

Top

1 2 3 4 D5 6 7 8 9

Set SetSet2 4 4 2MENU Zoom [ ]

(1)

(9)

MAX

Top

C2-5. C3-4.

C3-59

3.6.Zoom -

SpeedAdj 3

4

6

[ I-Gain ] [Trk]OFF A 1

A 2

V

[ ]MENU 1

SpeedAdj Zoom

Min: Max:

[ ]

99 01

R

Shtl VTR FRM1 RET

5

1 Set

Set

Set

2

CurveMode SpeedAdj Control: Sped

Zoom [ ]

SpeedAdj Zoom

Min: Max:

[ ]

D99 01

SpeedAdj Zoom

Min: Max:

[ ]

97 01

Zoom

A

SpeedAdj

A

Zoom

Top

Tracking: F-Hold: OFF

OFF

Movement

Zoom [ ]

99

Min 99

Set SetSet2 4 5MENU Zoom [ ]

Max

C2-5. C3-4.

C3-60

3.6.Zoom -

SpeedAdj 3

4

5

6

[ I-Gain ] [Trk]OFF A 1

A 2

V

R

[ ]MENU 1

SpeedAdj Zoom

Min: Max:

[ ]

99 01

Shtl VTR FRM1 RET

1 Set

Set

Set

2

CurveMode SpeedAdj Control: Sped

Zoom [ ]

SpeedAdj Zoom

Min: Max:

[ ]

03 99

SpeedAdj Zoom

Min: Max:

[ ]

99 D01

Zoom

A

SpeedAdj

A

Zoom

Top

Tracking: F-Hold: OFF

OFF

Movement

Zoom [ ]

01

01 Max

Set SetSet2 4 5 2MENU Zoom [ ]

Min

C2-5. C3-4.

C3-61

3.6.Zoom -

3

[ I-Gain ] [Trk]OFF A 1

A 2

V

R

[ ]MENU 1

Shtl VTR FRM1 RET

Zoom

Zoom

Top

1 Set

2

SpeedAdj Control: VR-Dem: ON

Zoom [ ]

Sped

SpeedAdj Control: VR-Dem: ON

Zoom [ ]

Posi

Tracking: F-Hold: OFF

OFF

Movement

Zoom [ ]

(D)Sped Posi

Set 2 4 6MENU Zoom [ ]

.Posi

. Posi

. Sped

C2-5. C3-4.

C3-62

3.6.Zoom - /.

3

[ I-Gain ] [Trk]OFF A 1

A 2

V

R

[ ]MENU 1

Shtl VTR FRM1 RET

Zoom

Zoom

Top

1 Set

2

Tracking: F-Hold: OFF

OFF

Movement

Zoom [ ]

Control: VR-Dem: DType: 300M

Zoom [ ]

ON Sped

Control: VR-Dem: DType: 300M

Zoom [ ]

OFF Sped

(D) ON OFF

Set 2 4 7MENU Zoom [ ]

/.

C2-5. C3-4.

C3-63

3.6.Zoom -

3

[ I-Gain ] [Trk]OFF A 1

A 2

V

R

[ ]MENU 1

Shtl VTR FRM1 RET

Zoom

Zoom

Top

1 Set

2

Tracking: F-Hold: OFF

OFF

Movement

Zoom [ ]

Control: VR-Dem: DType:

Zoom [ ]

ON Sped

300M

Control: VR-Dem: DType:

Zoom [ ]

ON Sped

300A

(D)300M 300A

Set 2 4 8MENU Zoom [ ]

VTR momentary alternate

momentary 300M

ZSD-300AZGA-200A300A

C2-5. C3-4.

C3-65

A.................................... C3-66

3.7.Focus

3.7.Focus

C3-66

5

1 9

Set Set Set2MENU Focus [ ]

[ I-Gain ] [Trk]OFF A 1

A 2

V

R

[ ]MENU 1

Focus [ ] CurveMode

CurveMode 3

4

6

Set

Set

ADemand: 5

Focus [ ] CurveMode

CurveMode ADemand: D5

Focus [ ]

CurveMode ADemand: 7

Focus [ ]

5

Shtl VTR FRM1 RET

Focus

A

CurveMode

A

Focus

Top

1 Set

2

CurveMode Focus [ ]

Stan da

rd

1

9

FAR

3.7.Focus -A

A

C2-5. C3-4.

C3-67

3.8 Info

................................................................. C3-68

................................................................. C3-69

/ ................................................. C3-71

............................................................. C3-72

3.8 Info

C3-68

3.8 Info -

Zoom Focus

3

Info

Top

Info

[ I-Gain ] [Trk]OFF A 1

A 2

V

R

[ ]MENU 1

Shtl VTR FRM1 RET

2

1 Set

Encoder: OFF Initialize

Info

Encoder: INDOFF

INDON

Initialize

Info

Encoder: Initialize CamSeri:

Info

CamSeri:

CamSeri: ON

ON

ON

(D)

2Set

OFF ON

MENU Info 1

C3-69

3.8 Info -

ONOFF

( )ON

Manual OFF

ON

ON OFF

OFF

ZOOM

ON

OFF

FOCUS

ON OFF

1 Fol.

2

3 ON

4 FOCUS

5

6 OFF

7

Initialize

Error!

C3-70

3.8 Info -

4

5

6

Info

Top

Info

[ I-Gain ] [Trk]OFF A 1

A 2

V

R

[ ]MENU 1

Shtl VTR FRM1 RET

2

1 Set

3 Set

Encoder: OFF

OFF Initialize

Info

Encoder: Info

Initialize Info

OFF OFF

Zoom: Focus:

Initialize Info

OFF Zoom: Focus:

OFF

Initialize Info

OFF Zoom: Focus:

ON

Initialize CamSeri: ON

CamSeri: ON

2 2

POWER OFF POWER ON

Set SetMENU Info

C3-71

3.8 Info - /

2

User

Top

Info

[ I-Gain ] [Trk]OFF A 1

A 2

V

R

[ ]MENU 1

Shtl VTR FRM1 RET

2

1 Set

Info

3

4

User

No. : User

1 Name: ResetAll

1

Encoder: OFF

ON

Info

Initialize CamSeri:

Info

OFF

Info

CamSeri: Initialize

ON

CamSeri: Initialize

Adjust

Adjust

(D) ON OFF

3Set 6MENU Info

/

C3-72

3.8 Info -

IrisZoomFocus

3

4

5

Info

Top

Info

[ I-Gain ] [Trk]OFF A 1

A 2

V

R

[ ]MENU 1

Shtl VTR FRM1 RET

2

1

Set

Set

Camera Fol

Set

EnterPassword

Set

Encoder: OFF Initialize

Info

Initialize Info

Adjust Camera Fol

CamSeri:

Adjust

Iris: Zoom: Focus:

Camera Fol

EnterPassword

ON

CamSeri: ON

C3-73

3.8 Info -

7

6

8

9

Set

Set

F2.8: F16:

Camera Fol

37150 26910

F2.8: F16:

Camera Fol

26910

F2.8: F16:

Camera Fol

26910

37150

37190

1

2

3 OFF

4 9

5

0000065530

Set

MENU

Set Set

DISPLAY

Set

Set

42

N

Info Adjust

Camera Fol

Camera Fol

Iris

Zoom

Focus

F2. 8 F16

: 00000 (37150) 65530 : 00000 (26910) 65530

Wide Tele

: 00000 (05000) 65530 : 00000 (52000) 65530

Near Far

: 00000 (05000) 65530 : 00000 (52000) 65530

C3-75

3.9 Fol.

IrisZoomFocus .............................................C3-76

3.9 Fol.

C3-76

Fol. 1SetMENU

Fol.

[ I-Gain ] [Trk]OFF A 1

A 2

V

R

[ ]MENU 1

Fol. Iris: Zoom: Focus:

0940 0527

0011

1

Shtl VTR FRM1 RET

1 SetFol.

Top

0 1000 IrisZoomFocus

Fol. 2

3.9 Fol. -IrisZoomFocus

IrisZoomFocus

C4-1

4

C4-2

Top

MENU

[ ]

[ Trk ]

A 1

V

A 2

R

[ Frm1 ]

[ Frm2 ]

AM

[ I-Tq ]

VTR

Shtl

OFF

1

RET

FRM1

Norm

Zoom

H

Shtl / NON / VTR / RET / FRM1 / FRM2 / Sped

1 / 2 / 3 / 4 / 5 / 6 / 7 / 8 / 9 / A / 0

C2-25

C2-19~C2-21

C2-22~C2-24

C2-28

C2-29

C2-4

C1-3

C2-14

C2-15

C2-16

C2-17

C2-18

[ Z.M. ]

C2-26,C2-27

OFF / ON

VTR / RET / FRM1 / FRM2 / Sped / Shtl

FRM1 / FRM2 / Sped / Shtl / NON / VTR / RET

RET / FRM1 / FRM2 / Sped / Shtl / VTR

Norm / Reve / Auto / Manu

Zoom / Iris

H / L

C3-26

[ I-Gain ]

C2-12,C2-13

C4-3

MENU

Zoom Focus

Iris Zoom Focus

User

Go Top

No. 1 / 2 / 3 / 4 / 5 / 6 / 7 / 8 / 9 / A / 0

1 / 2 / 3 / 4 / 5 / 6 / 7 / 8 / 9

y/n y/n

y/n y/n

/ / A Z / a z / 0 9 Name Reset

User AllUser

AllCopy

Zoom Focus

Zoom Focus

Start Stop

To No

Copy

Copy

AUX1 AUX2

Frame1

Frame2

ZSpeed ZMovement

VTR RET A/M SSaw

Switch

Preset

Auto Remote

[I-Gain]

Torque Comp Close

Iris

Seesaw Demand

Start Stop

Max Min

Tracking F-Hold

CurveMode

Movement

SpeedAdj

Control VR-Dem DType

Zoom

Focus CurveMode ADemand

#1

#2

#3

3

4

5

2

1

Iris Zoom Focus

Fol.

Shtl / NON / VTR / RET / FRM1 / FRM2 / Sped

VTR / RET / FRM1 / FRM2 / Sped / Shtl FRM1 / FRM2 / Sped / Shtl / NON / VTR / RET

RET / FRM1 / FRM2 / Sped / Shtl / VTR Nomal / Revers / Auto / Manual Zoom / Iris

Shtl

VTR FRM1

Unlock Unlock/Lock

1

n y

y/ny

n n

1

RET Nomal Zoom

PRE / FASTPRE

001 ~ 800800

PRE / FASTPRE

ON / OFF

ON / OFF

OFF / ON

OFF / ON

00 ~ 99 00 ~ 99

ON

ON

OFF

OFF

High / Low ON / OFF

High

ON OFF / ONOFF

OFF / ONOFF OFF / ONOFF

Sped / PosiSped ON / OFFON

OFF / ONOFF

OFF / ONOFF OFF / ONOFF

< >

< >

< >

300M / 300A 300M

(0000 ~ 1000)(**) (0000 ~ 1000)(**) (0000 ~ 1000)

00000 ~ 65530 00000 ~ 65530 00000 ~ 65530

(**)

1 ~ 9 1 ~ 9

5 5

00 ~ 99 00 ~ 99

99 91

End 00 ~ 9999

Min 99 01 ~ Max

99

1 ~ 95

01

99 91

01 ~ 99 01 ~ 9990

6

[ ]

Encoder Initialize

Adjust

Info

UserCopy To Other Lens Access

C3-4 C3-5

C3-2

C3-6 C3-7

C3-8

C3-9 C3-10,C3-11 C3-12,C3-13

C3-15~C3-18 C3-28 C3-29 C3-30 C3-31 C3-32 C3-33

C3-36 C3-37 C3-38 C3-39 C3-40 C3-41

C3-42

C3-43 C3-44

C3-46 C3-47

C3-48 C3-49 C3-50

C3-52 C3-53

C3-54 C3-55 C3-56

C3-57 C3-58

C3-59 C3-60 C3-61 C3-62 C3-63

C3-66

C3-68

C3-70 C3-70

C3-76 C3-76 C3-76

C3-72 C3-72 C3-72

CamSeri ON/OFF ON C3-71

AUX..........................................................................................................2-15,.3-28 FOCUS.............................................................................................................. 3-65 FRAME.PRESET.....................................................................................2-19,.3-35 RET..........................................................................................................2-18,.3-31 VTR..........................................................................................................2-16,.3-30 ........................................................................................2-12,.3-46 ........................................................................................2-25,.3-48 ..................................................................................................... 3-68 ................................................................................................. 3-71 ............................................................................................2-26,.3-54 ........................................................................................2-14,.3-52 ...................................................................................................3-72,.3-75 .......................................................................................................2-4,.3-3

INDEX AUX....................................................................................................2-15,.3-28 CAMERA.FOL....................................................................................3-72,.3-75 CAMERA.SERIAL.......................................................................................3-71 ENCODER..................................................................................................3-68 FOCUS........................................................................................................3-65 FRAME.PRESET...............................................................................2-19,.3-35 IRIS.GAIN..........................................................................................2-12,.3-46 IRIS.TORQUE....................................................................................2-25,.3-48 RET....................................................................................................2-18,.3-31 USER.....................................................................................................2-4,.3-3 VTR....................................................................................................2-16,.3-30 ZOOM.CURVE...................................................................................2-26,.3-54 ZOOM.TRACK...................................................................................2-14,.3-52

AUX.........................................................................................C2-15,.C3-28 FOCUS............................................................................................... C3-65 FRAME.PRESET....................................................................C2-19,.C3-35 RET.........................................................................................C2-18,.C3-31 VTR.........................................................................................C2-16,.C3-30 ..................................................................................C2-26,.C3-54 ..................................................................................C2-14,.C3-52 ................................................................................................. C3-68 .........................................................................................C3-72,.C3-75 ..................................................................................C2-25,.C3-48 ..................................................................................C2-12,.C3-46 ......................................................................................... C3-71 .............................................................................................C2-4,.C3-3

AMERICAS Canada Canon Canada, Inc.

Broadcast and Communications Div.

6390 Dixie Road, Mississauga, Ontario, L5T 1P7, Canada

Tel:+1(905)795-2012 Fax:+1(905)795-2087 Mexico Canon Mexicana, S. de R.L. de C.V.

Call Center Div.

Blvd. Manuel Avila Camacho No,138,

Col. Lomas de Chapultepec, Mexico, D.F.

Tel:+52 55 5249 4905

North & South America Canon U.S.A., Inc.

ITCG METC

65ChallengerRoad,RidgefieldPark,NJ,07660

Tel:+1(800) 423-5367 (Toll Free) Fax:+1(201) 807-3344

ASIA Asia & Hong Kong, S.A.R. Canon Hongkong Company Ltd.

ICP Marketing Div.

19/F, The Metropolis Tower, 10 Metropolis Drive,

Hunghom, Kowloon, Hong Kong

Tel:+852-3191-2333

89 15

100005 :+86(0)10-8513-9999 :+86(0)10-8513-9915

Korea ( )

607( ,5 )

06173

:(82)2-2191-8500 :(82)2-2191-8576

South & Southeast Asia Canon Singapore Pte. Ltd.

REGICPSales&MarketingDiv.

1 Fusionopolis Place, #15-10, Galaxis,

Singapore 138522

Tel:+65-6799-8888

108-8011 2-16-6

Tel: (03) 3740-3305 Fax: (03) 3740-3307 EUROPE, MIDDLE EAST, AFRICA

Europe/Africa/Middle East Canon Europe Ltd.

Broadcast Products Div.

3TheSquare,StockleyPark,Uxbridge,Middlesex,UB11

1ET UK

Tel:+44(0)20-8588-8140 Fax:+44(0)20-8588-8929 OCEANIA

Oceania Canon Australia Pty. Ltd.

CCI Div.

Building A, The Park Estate, 5 Talavera Road, Macquarie Park

NSW 2113, Australia

Tel:+61(0)2-9805-2000

146-8501 3-30-2

CANON INC. 30-2, Shimomaruko 3-chome, Ohta-ku, Tokyo 146-8501, Japan Subject to change without notice.

100005 89 15

: 2015.

Manualsnet FAQs

If you want to find out how the BCTV Zoom Lens Canon works, you can view and download the Canon BCTV Zoom Lens Operation Manual on the Manualsnet website.

Yes, we have the Operation Manual for Canon BCTV Zoom Lens as well as other Canon manuals. All you need to do is to use our search bar and find the user manual that you are looking for.

The Operation Manual should include all the details that are needed to use a Canon BCTV Zoom Lens. Full manuals and user guide PDFs can be downloaded from Manualsnet.com.

The best way to navigate the Canon BCTV Zoom Lens Operation Manual is by checking the Table of Contents at the top of the page where available. This allows you to navigate a manual by jumping to the section you are looking for.

This Canon BCTV Zoom Lens Operation Manual consists of sections like Table of Contents, to name a few. For easier navigation, use the Table of Contents in the upper left corner.

You can download Canon BCTV Zoom Lens Operation Manual free of charge simply by clicking the “download” button in the upper right corner of any manuals page. This feature allows you to download any manual in a couple of seconds and is generally in PDF format. You can also save a manual for later by adding it to your saved documents in the user profile.

To be able to print Canon BCTV Zoom Lens Operation Manual, simply download the document to your computer. Once downloaded, open the PDF file and print the Canon BCTV Zoom Lens Operation Manual as you would any other document. This can usually be achieved by clicking on “File” and then “Print” from the menu bar.